manualshive.com logo in svg

Mitel 6867i Premium, Administrator'S Manual

The Mitel 6867i Premium is a high-quality business phone designed for seamless communication. To set up and optimize its advanced features, simply download the free Administrator's Manual from our website. Gain complete control over your device's functionalities and enhance your business communications effortlessly.

Share
Download
background image

Administrator Level Options

3-7

6873i

CONFIGURING THE SIMPLIFIED IP PHONE UI OPTIONS MENU

You can enable the simplified IP Phone UI Options menu using the configurations files only.

For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, 

“Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu”

 on 

page 8.

MITEL WEB UI OPTIONS

An Administrator can configure specific options using the Mitel Web UI. These options display 

after an Administrator logs into the Web UI using a Web browser and entering the Admin 
username and password at the login prompt (The default username is "

admin

" and the default 

password is "

22222

". The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.) The column on the left 

FULL OPTIONS MENU

SIMPLIFIED OPTIONS MENU

Language

Removed

Time and Date

Removed

Status

Status

Bluetooth

Bluetooth

Directory

Removed

Credentials

Removed

Call Forward

Call Forward

Lock

Lock (Password Sub-Option Removed)

Audio

Audio

Display

Display

Dialing

Removed

Restart

Restart

Advanced

Only Factory Default option available.

Note: 

When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the Network settings from 

the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become misconfigured, you must use the Mitel 
Web UI to configure the network settings or factory default the phone through the Web 
UI and then use the Phone UI’s full options menu to recover the networks setting.

 CONFIGURATION FILES

Summary of Contents for 6867i Premium

Page 1: ...Mitel 6800 Series SIP Phones 58014473 REV00 RELEASE 4 2 0 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ...

Page 2: ... any purpose without written permission from Mitel Networks Corporation Trademarks The trademarks service marks logos and graphics collectively Trademarks appearing on Mitel s Internet sites or in its publications are registered and unregistered trademarks of Mitel Networks Corporation MNC or its subsidiaries collectively Mitel or others Use of the Trademarks is prohibited without the express cons...

Page 3: ...late or reduce to electronic medium or machine readable form or language derive source code without the express written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers or disseminate or otherwise disclose the Software to third parties All Software furnished hereunder whether or not part of firmware including all copies thereof are and shall remain the property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject t...

Page 4: ... 6867i IP Phone 1 12 Model 6869i IP Phone 1 15 Model 6873i IP Phone 1 18 Firmware Installation Information 1 20 Description 1 20 Important M685i Expansion Module Firmware Downgrade Information 1 20 Installation Considerations 1 20 Installation Requirements 1 21 Configuration Server Requirement 1 22 Firmware and Configuration Files 1 23 Description 1 23 Configuration File Precedence 1 25 Installing...

Page 5: ...ions 3 10 Phone Status 3 10 Restarting Your Phone 3 13 Set Phone to Factory Defaults Erase Local Configuration 3 14 Basic Settings 3 17 Account Configuration 3 37 Custom Ringtones 3 38 Network Settings 3 38 Line Settings 3 64 Softkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module Keys 3 65 Action URI 3 66 Configuration Server Settings 3 68 Firmware Update Features 3 75 TLS Support 3 76 802 1x Support 3 81 Tr...

Page 6: ...Configuration Server Protocol 4 99 Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol 4 99 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING OPERATIONAL FEATURES About this Chapter 5 2 Topics 5 2 Operational Features 5 6 Description 5 6 User Passwords 5 6 Administrator Passwords 5 8 Locking Unlocking the Phone 5 9 Emergency Dial Plan 5 14 Configurable Emergency Call Behavior 5 16 User Dial Plan Setting 5 17 Time and Date 5 18 Bac...

Page 7: ...rt 5 80 Status Scroll Delay 5 82 Switch Focus to Ringing Line 5 83 Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls 5 84 Call Hold Reminder on Single Hold 5 86 Call Hold Reminder Timer Frequency 5 87 Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout 5 88 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call 5 90 Message Waiting Indicator Line 5 92 Customizable Message Waiting Indicator MWI Request URI 5 94 DND Key Mode 5 94 Call Forwa...

Page 8: ...dit a Speeddial Key 5 165 Busy Lamp Field BLF 5 166 BLF Page Switch Feature 5 170 Configurable Display Modes for BLF and BLF List Softkey Labels 5 171 Configurable Display for Blank BLF List Softkeys 5 172 Configurable BLF or BLF List Key Behavior When in an Active Call 5 172 Ring Signal Type for BLF and BLF List 5 173 BLF Subscription Period 5 176 BLF Xfer and Speeddial Xfer Keys 5 177 Speeddial ...

Page 9: ...Configurable Indication of Terminated Calls 5 307 Centralized Conferencing for Sylantro and BroadSoft Servers 5 308 Custom Ad Hoc Conference 5 312 SIP Join Feature for 3 Way Conference 5 312 Conference Transfer Support for Live Dial Mode 5 313 Authentication Support for HTTP HTTPS Download Methods used with BroadSoft Client Management System CMS 5 314 Customizing the Display Columns on the M685i E...

Page 10: ...dia 6 36 Configurable Codec Negotiation Behavior 6 36 Call Info Header to 200ok Responses for Shared Call Appearance SCA Lines 6 37 Reason Header Field in SIP Message 6 37 Configurable Allow and Allow Event Optional Headers 6 38 Configurable SIP P Asserted Identity PAI 6 38 Configurable Route Header in SIP Packet 6 39 Configurable Compact SIP Header 6 40 Reject INV or BYE when Unsupported Value in...

Page 11: ...Method 7 3 Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files 7 4 Vendor Configuration File Encryption 7 6 CHAPTER 8 UPGRADING THE FIRMWARE About this Chapter 8 2 Topics 8 2 Upgrading the Firmware 8 3 Using the Firmware Update Page in the Mitel Web UI 8 3 Using the Restart Feature 8 5 Using the Auto Resync Feature 8 6 CHAPTER 9 TROUBLESHOOTING About this Chapter 9 2 Topics 9 2 Troubleshooting 9 3 Log Settin...

Page 12: ...e the phone s local configuration 9 26 How to reset a user s password 9 27 How do I lock and unlock the phone 9 29 APPENDIX A CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS About this Appendix A 2 Topics A 2 Setting Parameters in Configuration Files A 7 Operational Basic and Advanced Parameters A 8 Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu A 8 Network Settings A 9 DHCP Option Settings A 12 Password Settings A 15 Emergency Di...

Page 13: ...ettings A 65 Live Keyboard Settings A 66 SIP Local Dial Plan Settings A 67 SIP Outbound Support A 69 Contact Header Matching A 69 SIP Basic Global Settings A 70 Backup Outbound Proxy Global Settings A 78 SIP Basic Per Line Settings A 79 Backup Outbound Proxy Per line Settings A 89 BLA Support for MWI A 90 Shared Call Appearance SCA Call Bridging A 90 Centralized Conferencing Settings A 91 Custom A...

Page 14: ...ssed Calls Indicator Settings A 161 XML Settings A 162 Action URI Settings A 164 XML SIP Notify Settings A 169 Polling Action URI Settings A 170 Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings A 171 Ring Tone Per Line Settings A 173 Custom Ring Tone Settings A 174 Ring Tone via Speaker During Active Calls Settings A 175 No Service Congestion Tone Settings A 175 Status Code on Ignoring Incoming Calls A 176 ...

Page 15: ...ML Call Interception Settings A 210 ACD Auto Available Timer Settings A 212 Mapping Key Settings A 212 Send DTMF for Remapping Conference or Redial Key A 214 Park and Pickup Settings A 215 Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters A 217 Softkey Settings A 218 Configurable Positioning of Programmed Softkeys A 225 Shifting of Softkey Positions for Busy States A 226...

Page 16: ... Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings A 276 Blacklist Duration Setting A 277 Whitelist Proxy Setting A 277 XML Key Redirection Settings for Redial Xfer Conf Icom Voicemail A 277 Options Key Redirection Setting A 279 Off Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting A 279 XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting A 280 Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting A 280 Symmetric TLS Signaling Setting A 281 User Ag...

Page 17: ...hooting Parameters A 300 Log Settings A 300 WatchDog Settings A 302 Crash File Retrieval A 303 APPENDIX B CONFIGURING THE IP PHONE AT THE ASTERISK IP PBX About this Appendix B 2 Topics B 2 IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX B 3 APPENDIX C SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FILES About this Appendix C 2 Topics C 2 Sample Configuration Files C 3 6869i Sample Configuration File C 3 6865i Sample Configuration File C 1...

Page 18: ...r Services Warranty 1 After Warranty Service Warranty 1 Limited Warranty Australia Only Warranty 2 Repair Notice Warranty 2 Exclusions Warranty 2 Warranty Repair Services Warranty 3 After Warranty Service Warranty 3 Third Party Copyright Compliance Copyright 1 Expat XML Parser Copyright 1 M5T SIP Stack M5T Copyright 1 MD5 RSA Copyright 1 OpenSSL Copyright 2 libSRTP SRTP Cisco Copyright 6 Wind Rive...

Page 19: ...tion Included with the phone Mitel Models 6800 Series SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide explains how to set the phone up on the network as well as advanced configuration instructions for the 6800 Series SIP IP phones This guide contains information that is at a technical level more suitable for a system or network administrator Mitel Model Specific SIP IP Phone User Guides explains the most commonl...

Page 20: ...3 Configuring the Network and Global SIP Features on the IP Phone Chapter 4 Configuring operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 5 Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 6 Encryption information Chapter 7 Firmware upgrade information Chapter 8 Troubleshooting solutions Chapter 9 Configuration parameters Appendix A Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX...

Page 21: ...Chapter 1 OVERVIEW ...

Page 22: ...Accessories page 1 4 Model 6863i IP Phone page 1 7 Model 6865i IP Phone page 1 9 Model 6867i IP Phone page 1 12 Model 6869i IP Phone page 1 15 Model 6873i IP Phone page 1 18 Firmware Installation Information page 1 20 Important M685i Expansion Module Firmware Downgrade Information page 1 20 Installation Considerations page 1 20 Installation Requirements page 1 21 Configuration Server Requirement p...

Page 23: ...mmunicate over an IP network allowing you to receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol SIP The following illustration show the IP phone models in the 6800 series 6865i 6867i 6863i 6869i 6873i ...

Page 24: ...tc The following expansion modules are optional accessories designed to be used with the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones The M680i module adds 16 additional softkeys to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones andprovidespaperlabelsforeachsoftkey TheM685iadds3pagesof28 i e 84total additional softkeys to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones Labels can be configured and displayed on the ...

Page 25: ...n IP PHONE MODEL MAXIMUM OF DAISY CHAINED MODULES WHEN POWERED VIA 48V AC ADAPTER MAXIMUM OF DAISY CHAINED MODULES WHEN POWERED VIA POE POE CLASS 6865i 3 3 Class 2 6 49W 6867i 3 3 Class 2 6 49W without modules Dynamically switches to Class 3 12 95W when modules are attached 6869i 3 3 Class 3 12 95W 6873i 3 3 Class 3 12 95W without modules Dynamically switches to Class 4 25 50W when modules are att...

Page 26: ...ower source from the phone to attempt the upgrade again Unlike the M685i software upgrades for the M685i are performed simultaneously and therefore do not increase the upgrade time e g three connected M685i expansion modules will still take approximately 7 to 10 minutes to upgrade When using a combination of modules in tandem the process of upgrading should take approximately 7 to 10 minutes as we...

Page 27: ...S LCD screen Built in two port 10 100 Fast Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer 3 programmable keys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 2 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls AC power adapter sold separately Set paging Availability of feature dependent on your phone system or service prov...

Page 28: ...your settings Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator only options Goodbye Key Ends an active call The Goodbye key also exits an open list such as the Options List without saving changes Hold Key Places an active call on hold To retrieve a held call press the call appearance button beside the light that is flashing Line Call Appearance Keys Connects you to a line or ...

Page 29: ...two port 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer 8 programmable top keys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 24 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset mode support AC power adapter sold separately Enhanced busy lamp fields Set paging Availability of feature dependen...

Page 30: ... When you are editing entries on the display pressing the LEFT key erases the character on the left pressing the RIGHT key sets the option Alternatively pressing the center Select key sets the option as well on specific screens Transfer Key Transfers the active call to another number Conference Key Begins a conference call with the active call Options Key Accesses services and options to customize...

Page 31: ...ights Speaker Headset Key Transfers the active call to the speaker or headset allowing handsfree use of the phone Programmable Keys When programmed allows you to easily perform up to 8 specific functions e g Services Directory Received Callers List Intercom etc and access enhanced services provided by third parties e g XML applications KEY DESCRIPTION ...

Page 32: ... in two port 10 100 1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer USB 2 0 port 100mA maximum 6 programmable and 4 context sensitive softkeys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 24 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset mode support AC power adapter sold separately Enhanced busy ...

Page 33: ...e handset ringer and handsfree speaker Received Callers List Key Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received Outgoing Redial Key Accesses a list of the last 100 previously dialed numbers Pressing the Outgoing Redial key twice redials the last dialed number Line Call Appearance Keys Connects you to a line or call The Mitel 6867i IP Phone supports two line keys each with LED indicator lights Spea...

Page 34: ...ected contact Left Softkeys 6 programmable keys that allow you to easily perform up to 20 specific functions and access enhanced services provided by third parties e g XML applications Bottom Softkeys 4 programmable keys that support up to 18 functions These keys also act as state based keys allowing you to easily perform context sensitive functions during specific states i e when the phone is an ...

Page 35: ... Gigabit Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer USB 2 0 port 100mA maximum 12 programmable and 5 context sensitive softkeys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports up to 24 call lines with LEDs Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls Headset mode support AC power adapter sold separately Enhanced busy lamp fields Set paging ...

Page 36: ...me for the handset ringer and handsfree speaker Received Callers List Key Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received Outgoing Redial Key Accesses a list of the last 100 previously dialed numbers Pressing the Outgoing Redial key twice redials the last dialed number Line Call Appearance Keys Connects you to a line or call The Mitel 6869i IP Phone supports two line keys each with LED indicator li...

Page 37: ...d services provided by third parties e g XML applications Bottom Softkeys 5 programmable keys that support up to 24 functions These keys also act as state based keys allowing you to easily perform context sensitive functions during specific states i e when the phone is an idle connected incoming outgoing or busy state KEY DESCRIPTION ...

Page 38: ... 1000 Gigabit Ethernet switch lets you share a connection with your computer USB 2 0 port 500mA maximum Up to 48 top and 30 bottom softkeys Press and hold speeddial key configuration feature Supports 2 hard line keys with LEDs additional line keys programmable via softkeys Wideband handset Wideband full duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls USB and Bluetooth headset support AC power adapter sold...

Page 39: ...ng the administrator only options Mute Key Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute Volume Controls Adjusts the volume for the handset ringer and handsfree speaker Received Callers List Key Accesses a list of the last 200 calls received Outgoing Redial Key Accesses a list of the last 100 previously dialed numbers Pressing t...

Page 40: ...so upgrade to align itself with the new UI changes If downgrading the phone with an M685i Expansion Module from Release 4 2 0 to a firmware version of Release 4 1 0 or below it is required to first downgrade to Release 4 1 0 Hot Fix or 4 1 0 Service Pack and then to the Release 4 1 0 or below firmware version in such scenarios This will ensure the UI of the M685i Expansion Module is aligned with t...

Page 41: ...r to the phone IEEE 802 3af use an Ethernet cable to connect from the phone directly to the network for power no 48VAC power adapter required if using Power over Ethernet PoE For Ethernet networks that DO NOT supply power to the phone Use the respective power adapter to connect from the DC power port on the phone to a power source or Use a PoE power injector or a PoE switch Power source 6873i For ...

Page 42: ...llows you to Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone Stores configuration files for the IP phone REFERENCE To set the protocol for your configuration server see Chapter 4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol SIP Features the section Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99 To update the firmware on your phone see Chapter 8 Upgrading the...

Page 43: ...or the model name e g 6863i cfg 6865i cfg 6867i cfg 6869i cfg 6873i cfg MAC cfg for example 00085D1610DE cfg This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone Note Automatic download is dependent on your configuration server setup For more information about manual and automatic download of firmware see Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware For more information on changing the download pro...

Page 44: ...t Valencian lang_cs txt Czech UTF 8 lang_cs_op txt Czech ASCII lang_cy txt Welsh lang_de txt German lang_da txt Danish lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu txt Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl txt Galego lang_hu txt Hungarian lang_it txt Italian lang_nl txt Dutch lang_nl_nl txt D...

Page 45: ...aded from the configuration server 3 Values stored locally on the phone The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take effect For example if a parameter s value is set in the local configuration via Mitel Web UI or IP phone UI and the same value was also set differently in one of the startup cfg model cfg mac cfg files on the configuration server the local config...

Page 46: ...iguration server and the firmware files from the server specified in the URL When the firmware server parameter specifies a partial URL path the configuration server that is linked to the partial path is used to load the firmware For example firmware server path When there is no firmware server parameter or if it is empty the original configuration server is used to load the firmware Examples To d...

Page 47: ...ration Server Settings on page A 29 CSV DIRECTORY FILES LANGUAGE PACKS TLS CERTIFICATES 802 1X CERTIFICATES HTTPS FILES AND MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION SERVERS The CSV directory files language packs TLS certificate files 802 1x certificate files and HTTPS files can also be downloaded to the phone from a server other than the configuration server For each of these types of files you can specify a URL se...

Page 48: ...R OR ANOTHER SPECIFIED SERVER ARE BY ORDER security tuz startup cfg startup tuz model cfg model tuz mac cfg mac tuz CSV Directory Files directory 1 directory 2 Language Pack Files language 1 language 2 language 3 language 4 Transport Layer Security TLS Certificate Files sips root and intermediate certificates sips local certificate sips private key sips trusted certificates 802 1x Security Authent...

Page 49: ...s names you can specify for languages are lang_ca txt Catalan lang_ca_va txt Valencian lang_cs txt Czech UTF 8 lang_cs_op txt Czech ASCII lang_cy txt Welsh lang_de txt German lang_da txt Danish lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl txt Galego lang_...

Page 50: ...ollowing example downloads the German language pack to the phones from the original configuration server language 1 lang_de txt Transport Layer Security TLS Certificate Files sips root and intermediate certificates sips local certificate sips private key sips trusted certificates 802 1x Security Authentication Certificate Files 802 1x root and intermediate certificates 802 1x local certificate 802...

Page 51: ...e following example downloads no 802 1x local certificate file 802 1x local certificate The following example downloads the 802 1x local certificate for the phone from the original configuration server 802 1x local certificate 8021xlocalCert pem The following example uses FTP to download the firmware file 8021xlocalCert pem 802 1x local certificate file from the path directory on server 1 2 3 4 us...

Page 52: ...Chapter 2 CONFIGURATION INTERFACE METHODS ...

Page 53: ...es TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics Note Features characteristics requirements and configuration that are specific to a particular phone model are indicated where required in this guide TOPIC PAGE Configuration Methods page 2 3 IP Phone UI page 2 3 Mitel Web UI page 2 5 Configuration Files Administrator Only page 2 16 ...

Page 54: ...mation about the softkeys programmable keys see Chapter 5 Softkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module Keys on page 5 138 OPTIONS KEY The Options key allows you to access the Options List on the IP phone Accessible options in this list are for both User and Administrator use The Administrator must enter a password for administrator options This document describes the administrator options only For ...

Page 55: ... list of options 3 To select an option press the Enter softkey the button if applicable or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to the option in the Option List 4 Use the Set softkey after making a change to an option to save the change 5 Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option 6 Press the Cancel softkey press 3 press at any time to exit witho...

Page 56: ...tocol HTTP and Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer HTTPS client and server protocols HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files text graphic images sound video and other multimedia files over the Internet When you open your Web browser you are indirectly making use of HTTP HTTP is an application protocol that runs on top of the TCP IP suite of protocols the foundation protoco...

Page 57: ...in HTTPS client functions are Downloading of configuration files and firmware images Downloading of script files based on an HTTPS URL supplied by a softkey definition Note HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the TCP IP lower layer Both the HTTP and HTTPS port numbers are configurable using the configuration files the IP Phone UI the Mitel Web UI and DHCP Option 66...

Page 58: ... to download the startup cfg file the phone automatically sends aastra as the default Username and Password back to the server For more information about this feature see Chapter 5 the section Authentication Support for HTTP HTTPS Download Methods used with BroadSoft Client Management System CMS on page 5 314 USING HTTPS VIA THE MITEL WEB UI HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones When you op...

Page 59: ...g procedure to access the Mitel Web UI 1 Open your web browser and enter the phone s IP address or host name into the address field The following is an example of the Login screen that displays 2 Enter your username and password and click OK Note For an administrator the default username is admin and the password is 22222 For a user the default username is user and the password field is left blank...

Page 60: ...isplay in the side menu of the Mitel Web UI Status Operation Basic Settings Advanced Settings Status The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP phone It also displays hardware and firmware information about the IP phone The status window also displays the SIP Account information for each account on the phone The information in the Status window is read only Note P...

Page 61: ...able keys Applicable to User and Administrator Expansion Module N The M680i has up to 16 configurable keys The M685i has up to 84 configurable keys You can have up to 3 expansion modules attached to a single phone allowing you to configure keys for Expansion Module 1 Expansion Module 2 and Expansion Module 3 See your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide for applicable expansion modules for your mod...

Page 62: ...tion also allows you to set Outgoing Intercom Settings Admin Only Administrator can enable these for a User if required Incoming Intercom Settings Group Paging RTP Settings Key Mapping Admin Only Ring Tones Priority Alert Settings Admin Only Directed Call Pickup Settings Admin Only Auto Call Distribution Settings Admin Only Time and Date Settings Language Settings Only the Admin can specify the la...

Page 63: ...HTTP or HTTPS configure automatic firmware and configuration file updates enable disable auto resync and assign an XML push server list Applicable to Administrator Only Firmware Update Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP phone from the configuration server using any of the IP Phones supported protocols Applicable to Administrator Only TLS Support Allows you to specify SIP Ro...

Page 64: ...on the phones Administrators can start stop packet capturing configure capture ports set how long the capture should last and retrieve the capture file through the Capture page For more information on this feature see Chapter 9 the section Tcpdump Network Packet Capture Support on page 9 19 Applicable to Administrator Only HEADING DESCRIPTION ...

Page 65: ...o disable the Web UI on a single phone Open the startup cfg file to disable the Web UI on all phones 2 Enter the following parameter web interface enabled 0 3 Save the changes and close the model cfg mac cfg or the startup cfg file 4 Restart the phone to apply the changes The Mitel Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all phones WEB UI SECURITY FEATURES WEB UI Lock Asecurityenhancementh...

Page 66: ...y open or close HTTP HTTPs ports 80 and 443 as well as port 49249 Closing these ports not only disables users from accessing the Web UI and other services such as XML BroadWorks Xsi and custom ring tones but will also help nullify web server attacks as the ports will not be visible using port scanning software By defining the secure web service parameter as 1 in the configuration files Administrat...

Page 67: ...tings in the configuration files 1 Using a text based editing application open the configuration file for the phone for which you want to configure the CSV directory list either startup cfg model cfg mac cfg or all three 2 Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value For example directory 1 company_directory directory 2 my_personal_directory 3 Save the changes and c...

Page 68: ...ackwards compatible OVERWRITINGPARAMETERSWITHDEFAULTSINTHECONFIGURATION FILES An Administrator can specify a caret character before a configuration parameter in the startup cfg model cfg and mac cfg configuration files which allows the parameter to be overwritten and reset back to a specified value This can be convenient when changes are made by a user to specific parameters on the phone locally v...

Page 69: ... this parameter is locked sip registrar port 5062 this parameter is locked new model cfg file is loaded to the phone with sip proxy ip and any other parameter s from the file specifying a the sip proxy ip and any other parameters are overwritten if previously changed by the user new startup cfg file is loaded to the phone with sip proxy ip and any other parameter s from the file specifying a the s...

Page 70: ...redundancy via multiple DNS A record entries The phone tries to contact the first server address it receives but if this fails it now tries to contact the second server address etc This feature supports all the download protocols TFTP FTP HTTP and HTTPS Limitation In certain cases the TFTP Protocol cannot distinguish between server down and no file on server error messages therefore the failover i...

Page 71: ...Chapter 3 ADMINISTRATOR OPTIONS ...

Page 72: ...wing topics Note Specific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI and or Mitel Web UI and or configuration files TOPIC PAGE Administrator Level Options page 3 3 IP Phone UI Options page 3 3 Mitel Web UI Options page 3 7 Configuration File Options page 3 10 Phone Status page 3 10 Restarting Your Phone page 3 13 Set Phone to Factory Defaults Erase Local Configuration page 3 14 Basic Settin...

Page 73: ...nd or remote IP phones in a network An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI the Mitel Web UI or the configuration files IP PHONE UI OPTIONS Using the 6863i 6865i IP Phone UI you can access the Administrator options at Options Admin Menu using the default password of 22222 The following are administrator options in the Options List on the 6863i and 6865i Administr...

Page 74: ...nced Menu Configuration Server SIP Settings Network Settings Reset includes options for Erase Local Config and Factory Default Note An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use of password protection on the IP phone UI for all model phones This is configurable using the configuration files only For more information about this feature see Appendix A the section Password Setting...

Page 75: ...xisting options menu on the Phone UI with a more simplified options menu In the configuration files the options simple menu parameter allows you to display either the full menu if set to 0 or the simplified menu if set to 1 The following table illustrates the differences between the full menu and the simplified menu 6863i and 6865i Note When setting the options simple menu parameter the menu chang...

Page 76: ...NS MENU SIMPLIFIED OPTIONS MENU Language Removed Time and Date Removed Directory Removed Credentials Removed Call Forward Call Forward Lock Lock Password Sub Option Removed Status Status Audio Audio Display Display Dialing Removed Restart Restart Advanced Only Factory Default option available ...

Page 77: ... is admin and the default password is 22222 The IP phones accept numeric passwords only The column on the left FULL OPTIONS MENU SIMPLIFIED OPTIONS MENU Language Removed Time and Date Removed Status Status Bluetooth Bluetooth Directory Removed Credentials Removed Call Forward Call Forward Lock Lock Password Sub Option Removed Audio Audio Display Display Dialing Removed Restart Restart Advanced Onl...

Page 78: ...efaults Remove Local Configuration Settings Basic Settings Preferences General Local Dial Plan Send Dial Plan Terminator Digit Timeout seconds Basic Settings Preferences Outgoing Intercom Settings User can configure this via the Mitel Web UI if enabled by an Administrator Basic Settings Preferences Key Mapping Basic Settings Preferences Priority Alerting Settings Basic Settings Preferences Directe...

Page 79: ...ate TLS Support 802 1x Support Troubleshooting REFERENCES For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the Mitel Web UI see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults see Restarting Your Phone on page 3 13 and Set Phone to Factory Defaults Erase Local Configuration on page 3 14 For more information about Advan...

Page 80: ... or the Mitel Web UI PHONE STATUS VIA IP PHONE UI In the IP phone UI the Phone Status options are available to the user and the administrator and do not require a password entry Phone Status for 6863i and 6865i IP Phones IP MAC Addresses Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone LAN Port Displays the Link State Negotiation Method Speed and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its LAN po...

Page 81: ... State Negotiation Method Speed and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its PC Port Storage Displays the number of Local Directory Received Callers and Outgoing Redial List entries saved on the phone Error Messages Displays any error messages that occurred during the phone s last reboot PHONE STATUS VIA MITEL WEB UI The first screen that displays after logging into the Mitel Web UI for a phone is...

Page 82: ...ttheSIPregistrationstatusofthephone Ifthereareaccounts configured on the IP Phone their SIP status displays in this field Excluding the 6863i 2 lines all model phones display the status of up to 24 lines The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an account s STATUS CONDITION DESCRIPTION Registered Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SI...

Page 83: ...enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Restart option and press the button or Select softkey A Restart Phone prompt displays 3 Select Yes using the button to restart the phone Press No using the button to cancel the restart function For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Restart icon A Restart Phone prompt displays 3 Press Yes to restart the phone Press No to ca...

Page 84: ... factory Performing a factory default on the phone will revert all the settings in the startup cfg model cfg mac cfg and local configuration back to the original factory values You can reset a phone to factory defaults using the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI Setting Factory Defaults Using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Me...

Page 85: ...873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Reset icon 5 With the Factory Default option highlighted press the Select softkey A Factory Default prompt displays 6 Press Yes to restart the phone Press No to cancel the restart function Settings Factory Defaults Using the M...

Page 86: ...r the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 4 Navigate to the Reset option and press the button or Select softkey 5 Select Erase Local Cfg using the button or press the Select softkey An Erase Local Configuration prompt displays 6 Select Yes using the button to erase the local conf...

Page 87: ...ized configuration settings made on the phone BASIC SETTINGS An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and manage the IP Phone in the network The following sections identify the options available to an Administrator only or where indicated to a User and Administrator These tables also identify whether you can configure them using the Mitel Web UI IP Phone UI or the...

Page 88: ...meout between consecutive key presses For more information on this feature see Digit Timeout on page 5 70 Park Call Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators sip lineN park pickup config The parking of a live call to a specific extension Note This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is not available on the 6863i and 6865i To configure the Park feature on a key see Chapter 5 ...

Page 89: ...ed Dial Tone on page 5 79 XML Beep Support Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators xml beep notification Enables or disables the playing of a beep to indicate a status on the phone When the phone receives a status message the BEEP notifies the user that the message is displaying For more information on this feature see XML Beep Support on page 5 80 Status Scroll Delay seconds ...

Page 90: ...bles or disables the ability for the phone to initiate a continuous reminder tone on the active call when another call is on hold When this feature is disabled a ring splash is heard when the active call hangs up and there is still a call on hold For more information on this feature see Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls on page 5 84 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETER IN CONFIGURATION FILES D...

Page 91: ...his parameter is used with the call hold reminder frequency parameter 2 You must enable this call hold reminder timer parameter for it to work 3 A value of 0 disables the call hold reminder feature For more information on this feature see Call Hold Reminder Timer Frequency on page 5 87 call hold reminder frequency Note This option can be set by an Administrator only Specifies the time interval in ...

Page 92: ...a duration of inactivity on an active line For more information on this feature see Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout on page 5 88 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators goodbye key cancels incoming call Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone For more information on this feature see Goodbye Key Cancels Inco...

Page 93: ... For more information on this feature see Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices LLDP MED and Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN on page 5 98 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETER IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION INCOMING INTERCOM SETTINGS Auto Answer Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators sip allow auto answer Enables or disables the IP phone to ...

Page 94: ...er is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed Applicable settings are Phone Side Server Side OFF For more information on this feature see Incoming Outgoing Intercom with Auto Answer and Barge In on page 5 102 Prefix Code sip intercom prefix code The prefix to add to the phone number for server side outgoing Intercom calls This parameter is required for all ser...

Page 95: ... This option can be set by both Users and Administrators paging group listening Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses to send receive a Real Time Transport Protocol RTP stream to from these pre configured multicast addresses without involving SIP signaling For more information on this feature see Group Paging RTP Settings on page 5 105 ...

Page 96: ...one is idle During an active call the phone will send the custom number as DTMF using the phone configured DTMF method inbound vs out of band RFC2833 vs SIP INFO When a user presses the Redial key the mapped number will be sent out as DTMF during an active call if the current map redial key to parameter is configured to a number and the map redial as dtmf parameter is set to 1 For more information...

Page 97: ...Tones and Tone Sets on page 5 111 N A LineN Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators lineN ring tone Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per line basis Ring tone can be set to one of 15 distinct rings excluding silence or a custom ring tone For more information on this feature see Ring Tones and Tone Sets on page 5 111 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETER IN CONFIGUR...

Page 98: ...t priority When an alert priority keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone For more information on this feature see Priority Alerting on page 5 126 Auto Call Distribution alert auto call distribution When an alert acd keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP pho...

Page 99: ... the playing of a short ring splash tone when there is an incoming call on the BLF or BLF List monitored extension For more information on this feature see Ring Signal Type for BLF and BLF List on page 5 173 N A prgkeyN ring splash Controls the ring splash alert pattern per programmable key For more information on this feature see Ring Signal Type for BLF and BLF List on page 5 173 N A softkeyN ri...

Page 100: ...Available acd auto available Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto Available Timer For more information on this feature see Automatic Call Distribution ACD for Sylantro BroadWorks Servers on page 5 187 Auto Available Timer acd auto available timer Specifies the length of time in seconds before the IP phone status switches back to available For more information on this feature see Automatic C...

Page 101: ...ormation on this feature see Time and Date on page 5 18 Time Zone Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators N A time zone name Custom Parameters time zone minutes dst minutes dst start relative date dst end relative date dst start month dst end month dst start week dst end week dst start day dst end day dst start hour dst end hour This parameter allows you to set the time zone c...

Page 102: ...e see Time Servers on page 5 29 Time Server 3 Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators Time Server 3 time server3 This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time Server 3 in dotted decimal format For more information on this feature see Time Servers on page 5 29 PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION Live Dialpad...

Page 103: ...one UI and the configuration files N A live keyboard This parameter turns the Live Keyboard feature ON or OFF For more information on this feature see Live Dialpad on page 5 47 N A N A keyboard script Specifies the URI to be called when an alphabetic key on a K680i keyboard attached to a 6867i or 6869i SIP phone is pressed If this parameter is not defined or left blank the phone s native Directory...

Page 104: ...ation about loading language packs see Loading Language Packs on page 5 51 For more information on specifying a language to use on the IP Phone see Specifying the Screen Language to Use on page 5 52 Webpage Language Note This option can be set by both Users and Administrators web language The language you want to display for the Mitel Web UI Valid values are 0 English is default 1 4 The values 1 4...

Page 105: ...rs in the IP Phone UI Mitel Web UI and in XML applications via the keypad on the phone in the language s specified Valid values are English French Français German Deutsch Italian Italiano Spanish Español Portuguese Português Russian Русский Nordic Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only ελληνικά 6867i 6869i and 6873i only For more information on this feature see Specifying the Input Language to Use on pa...

Page 106: ... French lang_gl txt Galego lang_hu txt Hungarian lang_it txt Italian lang_nl txt Dutch lang_nl_nl txt Dutch Netherlands lang_no txt Norwegian lang_pl txt Polish ASCII lang_pl_pl txt Polish UTF8 lang_pt txt Portuguese lang_pt_br txt Brazilian Portuguese lang_ro txt Romanian lang_ru txt Russian lang_sk txt Slovak UTF8 lang_sk_op txt Slovak ASCII lang_sv txt Swedish lang_tr txt Turkish Notes 1 The la...

Page 107: ...e phone A pre configured DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF Sets the same CFWD configuration for all accounts All Busy and or No Answer When you configure the initial account the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts In the Mitel Web UI only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration Using the Mitel ...

Page 108: ...s see Custom Ring Tones on page 123 NETWORK SETTINGS The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on the IP phone Network settings are in two categories Basic network settings Advanced network settings NOTIFICATION WHEN INCORRECT NETWORK SETTINGS ENTERED If an Administrator enters incorrect network settings over the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI such as A 0 0 0 0 en...

Page 109: ...ay Domain Name System DNS servers TFTP HTTP HTTPS and FTP servers and Timer servers Note For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server your DHCP server must support Option 66 The IP phones also support Option 60 and 43 For more information see DHCP on page 4 4 IP Address IP Address ip IP address of the IP phone To assign a static IP address disable ...

Page 110: ...ring Network Settings Manually on page 4 23 Hostname Hostname hostname Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet For more information see Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone on page 4 13 Ethernet LAN Port Link PC Port Link PC Port Enabled 6863i and 6865i Enable PassThru Port 6867i 6869i and 6873i N A LAN Port PC Port PC Port PassThru Enable Disabl...

Page 111: ...tion 77 User Class on the IP Phone on page 4 15 Download Options DHCP Download Options dhcp config option override The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server Valid values are 1 Disabled ignores all DHCP configuration options 0 Any 43 66 159 160 Notes 1 If the DHCP server supplies Options 159 and 160 the phones will attempt to contac...

Page 112: ...re see Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices LLDP MED and Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN on page 5 98 N A Rport RFC 3581 sip rport Allows you to enable 1 or disable 0 the use of Rport on the IP phone Rport in RFC 3581 allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came For more informa...

Page 113: ...ation on page 4 33 Client Method HTTPS Client Method https client method Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during the Secure Socket Layer SSL handshake Available options are TLS Preferred The phone will initially attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 If the TLS protocol is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol TLS 1 0 Transport Layer...

Page 114: ...in of trust i e theoriginatorofthe files will not be performed if this feature is disabled Therefore disabling HTTPS validation of certificates is only recommended for troubleshooting purposes or when self signed certificates are in use For more information see Chapter 4 HTTPS Server Certificate Validation on page 4 37 Check Expires Check Certificate Expiration https validate expires Enables or di...

Page 115: ...te through a configuration server using the HTTPS protocol you must temporarily disable the https validate certificates Afterthecertificateisinstalledandyoucan re enable the https validate certificates parameter For more information see Chapter 4 HTTPS Server Certificate Validation on page 4 37 PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION Type of...

Page 116: ...CRIPTION GLOBAL SETTINGS VLAN Enable VLAN Enable tagging enabled Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones For more information see Chapter 4 Virtual LAN optional on page 4 43 Other Priority Priority Non IP Packet priority non ip Specifies the priority value for non IP packets For more information see Chapter 4 Virtual LAN optional on page 4 43 LAN PORT SETTINGS PORT 0 Phone VLAN ID VLAN ID vlan i...

Page 117: ...0 63 and the priority range is 0 7 Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma or with values outside the ranges are ignored For more information see Chapter 4 Virtual LAN optional on page 4 43 PC PORT SETTINGS PORT 1 PC Port VLAN ID VLAN ID vlan id port 1 Allows you to configure a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 1 PC port For more information see Chapte...

Page 118: ...different location than the PBX server the SIP parameters may need to be changed 2 For the 6863i and 6865i Global SIP settings are applicable only to Lines 1 and 2 For the 6867i 6869i and 6873i Global SIP settings are applicable only to Lines 1 to 4 To configure lines that do not have an associated Line hard key Administrators must configure each individual line manually 3 The IP phones allow you ...

Page 119: ...e per line User name used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the phone at the registrar Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 59 Display Name Caller ID Global and Per Line sip display name global sip lineN display name per line Name used in the display name field of the From SIP header fi...

Page 120: ...ineN bla number per line Phone number that you assign to BLA lines that is shared across all phones global configuration or shared on a per line basis per line configuration For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 59 For more information about BLA see Chapter 5 the section Bridged Line Appearance BLA on page 5 201 N A Line Mode Global and Per Line sip mode global sip lineN ...

Page 121: ...tion see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 59 N A Backup Proxy Port Global and Per Line sip backup proxy port global sip lineN backup proxy port per line The port number of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy port is unavailable For more information see Chapter 4 Basic SIP Settings on page 4 59 N A Outbound Proxy Server Global and Per Line sip ou...

Page 122: ... Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Enables or disables the phone to be registered with the Registrar When Register is disabled globally the phone is still active and you can dial using username and IP address of the phone A message No Service displays on the idle screen and the LED is steady ON If Register is disabled for a single line no messages display and LEDs are OFF For more information see C...

Page 123: ... Server URI Global and Per Line sip centralized conf global sip lineN centralized conf per line Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone For more information see Chapter 4 Centralized Conferencing for Sylantro and BroadSoft Servers on page 5 308 PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION Explicit MWI Subscription sip explicit mwi subscr...

Page 124: ...hat the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary Subscription feature This parameter is always enabled with a default value of 86400 seconds When the phone reaches the limit set for this parameter it sends the subscription again For more information about this parameter see Chapter 6 the section Missed Call Summary Subscription on page 6 13 AS Feature Event Subscription Global and Per Line sip as featu...

Page 125: ... to maintain the status of the connected sessions See RFC4028 for details Default is 0 For more information see Chapter 4 Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 77 Timer 1 and Timer 2 sip T1 timer sip T2 timer These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261 Timer 1 is an estimate in milliseconds of the round trip time RTT Timer 2 represents the amount of time in milliseconds a ...

Page 126: ...Certificates the Root and IntermediateCertificates theLocalCertificate and the Private Key are optional For more information see Chapter 4 Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 77 Local SIP UDP TCP Port sip local port Specifies the local source port UDP TCP from which the phone sends SIP messages Notes 1 It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport 2 B...

Page 127: ... regardless of whether the parameter sip outbound support is enabled or disabled For more information see Chapter 4 SIP and TLS Source Ports on page 4 31 Registration Failed Retry Timer sip registration retry timer Specifies the time in seconds that the phone waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar For more information see Chapter 4 Advanced SIP Setting...

Page 128: ...es this parameter controls how long the phone delays then retries a subscription when a SUBSCRIBE request is responded with a 408 timeout or 503 service unavailable error code For more information see Chapter 4 Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 77 N A sip subscription failed retry timer Applicable for all event packages this parameter controls how long the phone delays then retries a subscr...

Page 129: ... more information see Chapter 4 Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 77 Blacklist Duration sip blacklist duration Specifies the length of time in seconds that a failed server remains on the server blacklist The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server if another server is available for this amount of time For more information about Blacklist Duration see Chapter 6 the section B...

Page 130: ...AMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETERIN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION RTP Port Base RTP Port sip rtp port The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port Default is 3000 For more information see Chapter 4 Real ti...

Page 131: ...ls only are generated accepted For more information see Chapter 4 Real time Transport Protocol RTP Settings on page 4 83 PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETERIN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION N A Basic Codecs G 711 u Law G 711 a Law G 729 sip use basic codecs Enables or disables basic codecs Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending r...

Page 132: ...e suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones The phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression Disabling this feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value For more information see Chapter 4 Real time Transport Protocol RTP Settings on page 4 83 PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETERIN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION N A Autodial Number Global ...

Page 133: ...ndset If this parameter is set to a value greater than 0 the phone waits the specified number of seconds before dialing the pre configured number warmline when you lift the handset Default is 0 hotline For more information see Chapter 4 Autodial Settings on page 4 96 N A Use Global Settings Per line configurations only N A For each line this parameter specifies to use the global autodial settings ...

Page 134: ...s Advanced SIP Settings Missed Call Summary Subscription only RTP Settings DTMF Method and RTP Encryption only Autodial Settings On a per line basis you can also enable disable the Use Global Settings parameter Additional Settings Missed Calls only i e configure missed calls indicator applicability for specific lines REFERENCES For more information about configuring the features listed above on a ...

Page 135: ...oftkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module Keys on page 5 138 IP PHONE MODEL SOFTKEYS EXPANSIONMODULE KEYS PROGRAMMABLE KEYS 6863i N A 3 6865i 16 to 48 Model M680i 84 to 252 Model M685i 8 6867i 6 top maximum of 20 functions 4 bottom maximum of 18 functions 16 to 48 Model M680i 84 to 252 Model M685i 6869i 12 top maximum of 44 functions 5 bottom maximum of 24 functions 16 to 48 Model M680i 84 to 252...

Page 136: ...has not been configured i e the IP is 0 0 0 0 Note This action URI is not called when the same event is repeated for example a timeout occurs again when registration is already in a timeout state Incoming Call Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs Outgoing Call Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event o...

Page 137: ...P Phones see Chapter 5 the section XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 297 POLLING ACTION URIS Another way to reach a phone behind a firewall is to have the phone make an XML call at periodic intervals An Administrator can use the action uri poll to command the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval between poll...

Page 138: ...S Note For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the download servers your DHCP server must support Option 66 The IP phones also support Option 60 and 43 For more information see Chapter 4 the section DHCP on page 4 4 For more information about download protocols on the IP Phone see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99 Primary TFTP TFTP Server tftp server...

Page 139: ... this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99 Alternate TFTP Path Alternate TFTP Path alternate tftp path Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone If the IP phone s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub dire...

Page 140: ... a sub directory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99 FTP Username FTP Username ftp username The username to enter for accessing the FTP server This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone Note The IP Pho...

Page 141: ...erver s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99 HTTP Port HTTP Port http port Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99 Download Server HTTPS Ser...

Page 142: ...ectory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99 Download Port HTTPS Port https port Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP For more information see Chapter 4 Configuration Server Protocol on page 4 99...

Page 143: ...uto resync update Auto resync affects the configurationfilesonly However the settings in the Mitel Web UI take precedenceovertheIPphoneUIand the configuration files 3 The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone 4 If the IP phone is in use not idle at the time of the resync check the reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle 5 The automatic update feature works with both encrypted an...

Page 144: ...canbe entered as 02 56 For more information see Chapter 8 the section Using the Auto Resync Feature on page 8 6 N A Maximum Delay auto resync max delay Specifies the maximum time in minutes the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync For more information see Chapter 8 the section Using the Auto Resync Feature on page 8 6 N A Days auto resync days Specifies the amount of day...

Page 145: ...dates and configuration files during the boot process Setting an Auto Resync feature to automatically update the firmware configuration files or both at a specific time in a 24 hour period Feature can be enabled using the configu ration files or the Mitel Web UI REFERENCE For more information about firmware update see Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware XML PUSH SERVER LIST APPROVED IP ADDRESSES N A ...

Page 146: ...protocol Specifies the protocol that the IP phone uses to send out SIP messages Default is UDP Notes 1 If you set the value of this parameter to 4 TLS the phone checks to see if the sips persistent tls is enabled If it is enabled the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection If sipspersistenttls is disabled then the phone uses TLS on the connection If TLS is used you must specify the Root and In...

Page 147: ... the phone this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call Notes 1 There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per phone 2 If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS you must also specify the Trusted Certificate file to use The Root and Intermediate Certificates Local Certificate and Private Ke...

Page 148: ...The phone will retry the connection automatically when a persistent TLS connection is down When a persistent TLS connection is re established primary is up or primary is down and backup is up refresh registration of the accounts associated with the connection When a persistent TLS connection to primary is down switch to backup if connection to backup is working NA NA sip send sips over tls Allows ...

Page 149: ...his parameter is required when configuring TLS optional for Persistent TLS Note The certificate files must use the format pem To create custom certificate files to use on your IP phone contact Mitel Technical Support For more information see Chapter 6 the section Transport Layer Security TLS on page 6 20 N A Local Certificate Filename sips local certificate Allows you to specify the Local Certific...

Page 150: ...ne uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates The phone s trusted list must contain the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to For example if the phone is connecting to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1 and server B that has a certificate signed by CA2 the phone must have CA1 root certificat...

Page 151: ...tificates and private keys PARAMETER IN IP PHONE UI PARAMETER IN MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS IN CONFIGURATION FILES DESCRIPTION GENERAL 802 1x Mode EAP Type eap type Specifies the type of authentication to use on the IP Phone For more information see Chapter 6 the section 802 1x Support on page 6 23 Identity Identity identity Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone Note Th...

Page 152: ...icate Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate For more information see Chapter 6 the section 802 1x Support on page 6 23 N A Private Key Filename 802 1x private key Specifies the file name that contains the private key For more information see Chapter 6 the section 802 1x Support on page 6 23 N A Trusted Certificates Filename 802 1x trusted certificates Specifies the file name ...

Page 153: ...ile to a specified location if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature Save the current user_local configuration file to a specified location if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature Show task and stack status including Free Memory and Maximum Memory Block Size Enable disable a WatchDog task View System and Error Messages Enable disable the uploading of configuration and crash file...

Page 154: ...Chapter 4 CONFIGURING NETWORK AND SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL SIP FEATURES ...

Page 155: ...ion files the IP Phone UI and the Mitel Web UI where applicable TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Overview page 4 3 Network Settings page 4 4 Basic Network Settings page 4 4 Advanced Network Settings page 4 31 Global SIP Settings page 4 59 Basic SIP Settings page 4 59 Advanced SIP Settings optional page 4 77 Real time Transport Protocol RTP Settings page 4 83 RTCP Summary ...

Page 156: ...re the phone using the Mitel Web UI you must enter an administrator username and password 7 REFERENCES For configuring the IP phone at theAsterisk IP PBX see Appendix B Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX For sample configuration files see Appendix C Sample Configuration Files These sample files include basic parameters required to register the IP phone at the PBX Note An administrator...

Page 157: ... querying a DHCP server allowing a network administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network parameters for the phone If DHCP is enabled the IP phone requests the following network information Subnet Mask Gateway i e router Domain Name System DNS Server Network Time Protocol Server IP Address TFTP Server or Alternate TFTP Server if enabled on the phone TFTP Path or Al...

Page 158: ...ocedure to enable disable DHCP on the phone using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu 3 Enter your Administrator password 4 Select Network Settings 5 Select option DHCP 6 Press Change to set Use DHCP to Yes enable or No disable 7 Press Done to save the changes For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options Li...

Page 159: ... UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Basic Network Settings 2 Enable the DHCP field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box 3 Click Save Settings to save your settings DHCP OPTIONS 66 60 AND 43 SERVER CONFIGURATIONS Option 66 The IP Phones support download protocols as referenced in RFC2131 and RFC1541 TFTP FTP HTTP HTTPS to support DHCP option 66 Option 66 is part o...

Page 160: ... DHCP Option 60 Vendor Class Identifier information that includes firmware and bootrom information in addition to the identifier value If the parameter is configured as 0 disabled default the phone will send simply a DHCP Option 60 value consisting of the identifier value If the parameter is configured as 1 enabled the phone will send a DHCP Option 60 value consisting of the identifier value firmw...

Page 161: ...IPPhone6867i option AastraIPPhone6867i cfg server name code 02 text option space AastraIPPhone6869i option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name code 02 text Subnet 192 168 1 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 class vendor class 6867i match if option vendor class identifier AastraIPPhone6867i vendor option space AastraIPPhone6867i option AastraIPPhone6867i cfg server name ftp username password 10 10 10 1 class ...

Page 162: ...th the existing code 2 sub option to set the configuration server PROTOCOL FORMAT EXAMPLES HTTP http server path option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name http 192 168 1 45 option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name http 192 168 1 45 path option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name http httpsvr example com path HTTPS https server path option AastraIPPhone6869i cfg server name https 192 168 1 45 optio...

Page 163: ...e outbound proxy server that can be used for all outbound SIP requests Using the use dhcp option 120 configuration parameter administrators can enable support for DHCP Option 120 on the IP phones This is particularly useful when service providers require the IP phones to use certain outbound proxy servers or Session Border Controllers SBCs based on geographical location and have provisioned the ou...

Page 164: ...set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section DHCP Option Settings on page A 12 USING OPTION 132 802 1P VLAN ID AND OPTION 43 TO TRANSFER VLAN ID ASSIGNMENT USING DHCP There are now two ways of transporting the VLAN ID parameter in the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP By DHCP Option 43 vendor specific information By DHCP Option 132 802 1P VLAN ID When the phone receives the VLA...

Page 165: ...option space AastraIPPhone option AastraIPPhone cfg server name code 02 text option AastraIPPhone contact rcs code 03 boolean option AastraIPPhone ActivateVLANHeader code 08 text option AastraIPPhone VLAN ID code 09 unsigned integer 32 class AastraSIP match if option vendor class identifier AastraIPPhone6863i or option vendor class identifier AastraIPPhone6865i or option vendor class identifier Aa...

Page 166: ...figuring DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section DHCP Option Settings on page A 12 For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu 3 Select Network Settings 4 Select Hostname 5 By d...

Page 167: ...y Valid values are up to 64 alpha numeric characters You can use a fully qualified domain name if required 7 Restart the phone for the change to take affect For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Network icon 5 Press the Settings icon 6 Press the Hostname ...

Page 168: ...figuration server This Option 77 defines specific User Class identifiers to convey information about a phone s software configuration or about its user s preferences For example you can use the User Class option to configure all phones in the Accounting Department with different user preferences than the phones in the Marketing Department A DHCP server uses the User Class option to choose the addr...

Page 169: ...o your phones then press DONE Valid values are up to 64 alpha numeric characters For example admin 7 Restart the phone for the change to take affect For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Select Network Settings 5 Press the down navigation key to the DHCP User Class field...

Page 170: ...nfiguration files DHCP Download Options Mitel Web UI or Download Options IP Phone UI Setting this parameter results in the phone only using the chosen DHCP option and ignoring the other options For more information about setting DHCP download preference see Configuration Server Download Precedence on page 4 20 Configuring DHCP Download Options on the IP Phones Use the following procedures to confi...

Page 171: ...ect Network Settings 5 Press the down navigation key to the DHCP Download Options field 6 Select one of the following DHCP download options using the left and right navigation keys Any default no override uses normal precedence order of 43 160 159 66 Option 43 Option 66 Option 159 Option 160 Disabled Ignores all DHCP configuration options 43 66 159 160 7 Press the Save softkey 8 Restart the phone ...

Page 172: ...e phone for the selection to take affect 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Advanced Network Settings 2 In the DHCP Download Options field select an option to use to override the normal precedence order Valid values are Any default no override uses normal precedence order of 43 160 159 66 Option 43 Option 66 Option 159 Option 160 Disabled Ignores all DHCP configuration options 43 66 159 160 3 Cl...

Page 173: ...ure to configure the DHCP download precedence using the configuration files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section DHCP Option Settings on page A 12 Configuring a Download Precedence Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Optio...

Page 174: ...nced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Network icon 5 Press the Settings icon 6 Press the DHCP Download Options field 7 Select the Disabled value 8 Press the Save softkey 9 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect Note Disabled Ignores all DHCP configuration options 43 66 159 160 This option also performs the same functio...

Page 175: ...information Options 43 66 159 or 160 then the phone times out and continues using the first DHCP offer without listening for more DHCP offers If the first DHCP message contains no configuration server information the phone continues to listen for other DHCP messages If the second DHCP message contains configuration server information and other conditions the phone chooses the second DHCP message o...

Page 176: ... Administrator if an incorrect value is being entered for the following network parameters in the IP Phone UI and the Mitel Web UI A 0 0 0 0 entered as values for the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway parameters IP Address and Gateway IP address parameter values entered exactly the same Gateway IP address and the IP address parameter values configured on the same subnet If you configure the Gatew...

Page 177: ...tings 5 In the IPAddress field enter the IP address of your phone The IPAddress must be entered in the format 0 0 0 0 for example 192 168 0 7 6 In the Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask address For example 255 255 0 0 7 In the Gateway field enter the IP address of your gateway The Gateway must be entered in the format 0 0 0 0 for example 192 168 0 1 8 If required enter the Primary DNS and or ...

Page 178: ... 0 0 0 0 for example 192 168 0 1 9 If required enter the Primary DNS and or Secondary DNS in the respective fields The IP addresses must be entered in the format 0 0 0 0 10 Press the Save softkey The IP Phone is manually configured 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Basic Network Settings 2 Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field 3 Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field 4 ...

Page 179: ...nes to auto negotiate during transmission Half Duplex 10Mbps 100Mbps or 1000Mbps Half duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier but not at the same time For example on a LAN using a technology that has half duplex transmission one device can send data on the line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in which ...

Page 180: ...t Administrator Menu 3 Select Network Settings 4 Select Ethernet 5 Select LAN Port Link 6 Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done Valid values are AutoNegotiation Full 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 7 Default is AutoNegotiation 8 Select PC Port Link 9 Select a negotiation method to use o...

Page 181: ...ull 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps 6 Default is AutoNegotiation 7 Press the left navigation key and press down to highlight PC Port 8 Select a negotiation method to use on port 1 Valid values are AutoNegotiation Full 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps 9 Default is AutoNegotiation 10 Press the Save softkey 11 Restart the phone for ...

Page 182: ...00Mbps Full 1000Mbps Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps Default is AutoNegotiation 7 Press PC Port 8 Select a negotiation method to use on port 1 Valid values are AutoNegotiation Full 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Full 1000Mbps Half 10Mbps Half 100Mbps Half 1000Mbps Default is AutoNegotiation 9 Press the Save softkey 10 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect Note If required swipe left on th...

Page 183: ...ps Half Duplex 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones only Default is Auto Negotiation 3 In the PC Port field select a negotiation method to use on port 1 Valid values are Auto Negotiation Full Duplex 10Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones only Half Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex 1000Mbps ap...

Page 184: ...set in the configuration files see Appendix A the sections Local SIP UDP TCP Port Setting on page A 30 Local SIP TLS Port on page A 31 Note The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI are VLAN and QoS only Notes 1 By default the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages When symmetric UDP is enabled the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages usi...

Page 185: ...e this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535 3 The Local SIP TLS Port field has a default value of 5061 Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI Note It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport Note It is recommended that you avoid t...

Page 186: ...nd firmware images Downloading of script files based on an HTTPS URL supplied by a softkey definition The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections It coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks The main HTTPS server functions are Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a s...

Page 187: ... is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol TLS 1 0 SSL 3 0 8 Press Done to save the changes Configure HTTPS Server 9 Select HTTPS Server 10 Select HTTP HTTPS 11 Press Change to select Yes or No Default is No Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS 12 Press Done to save the changes 13 Select XML HTTP POSTs 14 Press Change to select Yes or No Default ...

Page 188: ...he HTTPS Client Method field press a client method value to use for HTTPS Valid values are TLS Preferred default The phone will initially attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 If the TLS protocol is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol TLS 1 0 SSL 3 0 Configure HTTPS Server 7 In the HTTPS Server field enter the IP address of the HTTPS server in the text box Enabling ...

Page 189: ...ill automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol TLS 1 0 SSL 3 0 Configure HTTPS Server 7 In the HTTPS Server field enter the IP address of the HTTPS server Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS 8 Press the Save softkey 9 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network HTTPS Settings 2 Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS ...

Page 190: ...TTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates This feature supports the following Comodo EssentialSSL and 4096 bit RSA CyberTrust DigiCert Entrust GoDaddy Geo Trust Mitel MiVoice Border Gateway MBG Symantec Class 3 Secure Server CA G4 Thawte TrustZone or Verisign signed certificates User provided certificates Checking of hostnames SSL Wildcard certificate i e SSL certificat...

Page 191: ...e certificate SSL Certificate Subject Alternative Name SAN Support The 6800 Series SIP phones support Subject Alternative Names SANs when validating SSL certificates SANs allow Administrators to specify a list of hostnames that can be protected by a single SSL certificate When the https validate hostname Check Hostnames option on the Web UI is enabled the names defined as SANs in a certificate are...

Page 192: ...LCD For Verisign Certificate Rejection The phones support 2048 bit Verisign certificates In case of a certificate error detailed descriptions can be found from the error message list in the phone status menu The following error descriptions are now available No Certificate Bad Certificate Unsupported Certificate Certificate Revoked Certificate Expired Certificate Unknown Configuring HTTPS Server C...

Page 193: ...e to toggle the Check Expires field to Yes or No 10 Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen Enable Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname 11 Select Check Hostnames 12 Press Change to toggle the Check Hostnames field to Yes or No IP PHONE UI Note If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method and use a self signed certificate you must set this field to No before upgrading to ...

Page 194: ...n to enable the feature Enable Disable HTTPS Validate Hostname 8 In the Check Hostnames checkbox press the button to enable the feature 9 Press the Save softkey 10 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Press the Configuration ...

Page 195: ...ar the check mark When this parameter is enabled the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate 4 The Check Certificate Hostnames field is enabled by default To disable validation of hostnames click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark MITEL WEB UI Notes 1 This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS butt...

Page 196: ...n contained within the tag VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default When you enable VLAN the IP phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters If you choose to change these parameters you can configure them using the configuration files the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP phones TYPE OF SERVICE TOS QUALITY OF SERVIC...

Page 197: ...id or vlan id port 1 parameters 2 Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID vlan id to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID vlan id port 1 to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames from the PC Port containing a VLAN ID to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN Port and frames from the LAN Port without a VLAN ID to be tagged with the configured VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC Port For configuring this feat...

Page 198: ...y modifying just the DSCP values just the VLAN priority values or by modifying all values The following table shows the DSCP range VLAN priority mapping The following table identifies the default DSCP values for the protocols Configuring Type of Service ToS DSCP optional Use the following procedures to configure ToS DSCP on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration file...

Page 199: ... 5 Enter a value for Type of Service SIP Default is 26 or Enter a value for Type of Service RTP Default is 46 or Enter a value for Type of Service RTCP Default is 46 Valid values are 0 to 63 6 Press the Save softkey Note If you change the ToS DSCP setting for a Protocol and VLAN is enabled you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the first table in DSCP Rang...

Page 200: ...P Default is 46 Valid values are 0 to 63 7 Press the Save softkey 8 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Type of Service DSCP 2 Select a Protocol field SIP or RTP or RTCP 3 Enter a value from 0 to 63 Default values are as follows SIP 26 RTP 46 Note If required swipe left on the screen to navigate to the second page of options Note If you change th...

Page 201: ...ote If you change the ToS DSCP setting for a Protocol and VLAN is enabled you will need to map the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the first table in DSCP Range VLAN Priority Mapping on page 4 44 For more information see the section Configuring VLAN optional on page 4 48 Note VLAN is disabled by default When you enable VLAN the IP phones use the default settings for each VL...

Page 202: ...ue from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port Default is 1 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged VLAN Settings VLAN Enable VLAN Settings LAN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID 4095 VLAN Settings ...

Page 203: ...ettings LAN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID 3 VLAN Settings PC Port VLAN PC Port VLAN ID 4095 21 Press Enter or Set to save the change 22 Select PC Port Priority 23 Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port Default is 0 24 Press Done to save the changes 25 Navigate back to the Options List menu 26 Select Restart Phone and follow the prompts to restart the phone and apply the conf...

Page 204: ...cify the RTP priority for the LAN Port Default is 5 10 In the LAN Port VLAN RTCP Priority field enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the RTCP priority for the LAN Port Default is 5 To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port Port 1 11 In the PC Port VLAN PC Port VLAN ID field enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port Default is 4095 Example You enable tagging on the phone po...

Page 205: ...AN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID field enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port Default is 1 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and the PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged VLAN Settings VLAN Enable VLAN Settings LAN...

Page 206: ...owing example sets the LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged VLAN Settings VLAN Enable VLAN Settings LAN Port VLAN LAN Port VLAN ID 3 VLAN Settings PC Port VLAN PC Port VLAN ID 4095 13 In the PC Port VLAN Priority field enter a value from 0 to 7 to specify the PC Port VLAN priority Default is 0 14 Press the Save softkey 15 Restart the phone for the selection to take af...

Page 207: ...7 Defaults are as follows SIP Priority 3 RTP Priority 5 RTCP Priority 5 To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port Port 1 6 Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field Default is 4095 Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the PC Port VLAN ID to 4095 and Note Setting the LAN Port VLAN ID to 4095 and PC Port VLAN ID to any ID from 1 to 4094 will allow frames f...

Page 208: ...A parameter created for the Via header called Rport in RFC 3581 allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came When you enable Rport the phone always uses symmetric signaling listens on the port used for sending requests An Administrator can configure Rport using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Configu...

Page 209: ...nt to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address and the port from which the request came 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes NETWORK TIME SERVERS Network Time Protocol NTP is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize the phone clock time with a computer configuration server in the network To use NTP you must enable it using the configuration files or the...

Page 210: ... Timer Server 2 or Time Server 3 5 Enter the IP Address in dotted decimal or qualified domain name for the Time Server 6 Press Done to save the change For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Time and Date Set Date and Time 3 In the Timer Server 1 Time Server 2 and or Time Server 3 fields enter the respective IP address in dotted decimal or qualified domain name ...

Page 211: ... Time and Date Setting 2 Enable the NTP Time Servers field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box Default is disabled 3 Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the Time Server 1 Time Server 2 and or Time Server 3 field s to specify the location of the NTP time server 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 212: ...rk see Basic SIP Settings on page 4 59 For more information about Advanced SIP Settings see Advanced SIP Settings optional on page 4 77 BASIC SIP SETTINGS Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per line basis You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI the Mitel Web UI or the configuration files If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a diff...

Page 213: ...bla number sip mode call waiting see Chapter 5 Configuring Operational Features sip vmail SIP GLOBAL NETWORK PARAMETERS Proxy Server Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Proxy Server Proxy Port Backup Proxy Server Backup Proxy Port Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Port Backup Outbound Proxy Backup Outbound Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Backup Registrar Server Backup Registra...

Page 214: ...vmail SIP PER LINE NETWORK PARAMETERS Proxy Server Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Proxy Server Proxy Port Backup Proxy Server Backup Proxy Port Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Port Backup Outbound Proxy Server Backup Outbound Proxy Port Registrar Server Registrar Port Backup Registrar Server Backup Registrar Port Registration Period Conference Server URI see Chapter 5 Configuring ...

Page 215: ...he configuration files seeAppendixA the section SIP Basic Global Settings on page A 70 SIP PRECEDENCE EXAMPLE The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for storage and parsing of the SIP configuration parameters The following SIP configuration is assumed SIP network block sip proxy ip 10 30 11 154 sip proxy port 5060 sip registrar ip 10 44 122 37 sip registrar port 4020 ...

Page 216: ...b UI SIP OUTBOUND SUPPORT The IP Phones support draft ietf sip outbound 15 That specification describes how a SIP User Agent UA behind a firewall reuses an existing connection usually the REGISTER outbound connection for the inbound request if the proxy supports it The UA uses keep alive packets to monitor the connection status An Administrator can enable or disable this feature using the followin...

Page 217: ...he backup proxy When the primary registrar comes back online the phone registers to it using the currently active AOR When the primary proxy comes back online the phone registers with the primary AOR to the currently active registrar and moves all subscriptions to the primary proxy backup proxy backup registrar and backup outbound proxy configured All invite register and subscribe requests attempt...

Page 218: ... registrar moves subscriptions to the primary proxy unregisters unsubscribes from the backup proxy registrar backup proxy backup registrar and backup outbound proxy configured Note This configuration assumes that the outbound proxy is maintaining its own outbound connections to the proxy registrar Establishes a flow to the primary outbound proxy If the flow fails the phone establishes the flow to ...

Page 219: ...ft ietf sip outbound 15 is supported SIP SERVER SRV LOOKUP The SIP SRV Lookup feature allows you to configure the IP phone to issue a DNS query to retrieve records pertaining to a SIP proxy a SIP registrar or a SIP outbound proxy PARAMETER MITEL WEB UI CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION FILE CONFIGURATION sip outbound support 4 sip symmetric udp signaling 4 sip transport protocol 4 4 GLOBAL PARAMETERS si...

Page 220: ...der matching However in specific networks such as behind some SOHO routers the phone registers with its private address in the Contact but when the response is sent back the router maintains the public side IP address in the Contact header This causes a non matching Contact header and the phone does not accept the new registration expiry timer You can set the parameter sip contact matching which a...

Page 221: ...e Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu 3 Select SIP Settings 4 Select User Name to enter the username that appears in the name field of the SIP URI This user name is also used for registering the phone at the registrar 5 Press Done to save the changes 6 Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the From SIP header field 7 Press Done to save the changes 8 Select Sc...

Page 222: ... header 7 In the Screen Name field enter the name to display on the idle screen 8 In the Auth Name field enter the authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request 9 In the Password field enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy 10 Press the Save softkey 11 Restart the phone for the changes to take affect For the...

Page 223: ... name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request 10 In the Password field enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy 11 Press the Save softkey 12 Restart the phone for the changes to take affect 1 For global configuration click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Basic SIP Authen tication Settings Note If required swipe left on the...

Page 224: ...quest 8 In the Password field enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy 9 In the BLA Number field enter the Bridge Line Appearance BLA number to be shared across all IP phones For more information about setting the BLA on the phone see Chapter 5 the section Bridged Line Appearance BLA on page 5 201 10 In the Line Mode field select Generic for normal mode BroadSoft SCA for...

Page 225: ...s the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section SIP Basic Global Settings on page A 70 or SIP Basic Per Line Settings on page A 79 For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Administrator Menu 3 Select SIP Settings Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port 4 Select Proxy IP Port 5 Enter an IP...

Page 226: ...Yes enable or No disable Default is Yes This parameter enables disables the IP phone to register on the network 14 Press Done to save the changes 15 Select Restart For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Select SIP Call Server Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port 5 In the P...

Page 227: ...ly qualified host name in the Proxy Server field Default is 0 0 0 0 7 In the Proxy Port field enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server For example 5060 Default is 0 Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port 8 In the Registrar Server enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field Default is 0 0 0 0 A global value of 0 0 0...

Page 228: ...ttings 2 Or for per line configuration click on Advanced Settings Line N Basic SIP Network Settings 3 In the Proxy Server field enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server 4 In the Proxy Port field enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server 5 In the Backup Proxy Server field enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup proxy server MITEL ...

Page 229: ...vice message does not display and the mes sage waiting indicator MWI does not come on 12 In the Registrar Port field enter the port number associated with the Registrar 13 In the Backup Registrar Server field enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup registrar server A global value of 0 0 0 0 disables registration However the phone is still active and you can dial using usern...

Page 230: ...tures AS Feature Event Subscription global AS Feature Event Subscription per line see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features AS Feature Event Subscription Period see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features sip as feature event subscription global sip lineN as feature event subscription per line see Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features sip as feature event su...

Page 231: ...nfiguring Advanced Operational Features CONFIGURING ADVANCED SIP SETTINGS Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Advanced SIP Settings on page A 95 N A N A sip subscription timeout retry timer sip subscription failed retry timer BLF Subscription Period see Chapter ...

Page 232: ...ld by unchecking the check box Default is disabled If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider a Message Waiting Indicator MWI LED or display icon tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone 3 If you enable the Explicit MWI Subscription field then in the Explicit MWI Subscrip tion Period field enter the requested duration in seconds before the MWI subscriptio...

Page 233: ...essage features see Chapter 6 the section TR 069 Support on page 6 8 8 In the Session Timer field enter the time in seconds that the IP phone uses to send periodic re INVITE requests to keep a session alive The proxy uses these re INVITE requests to maintain the status of the connected sessions See RFC4028 for details 9 In the Timer 1 and Timer 2 fields enter a time in milliseconds that will apply...

Page 234: ...ted by the reg istrar Valid values are 30 to 1800 Default is 1800 15 In the Registration Timeout Retry Timer field enter the amount of time in seconds that the phone waits until it re attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out Valid values are 30 to 2147483647 Default is 120 16 In the Registration Renewal Timer field enter the threshold value in seconds prior to expiration that the ph...

Page 235: ... to a failed server if another server is available for this amount of time 21 For information about setting the Blacklist Duration see Chapter 6 the section Blacklist Duration on page 6 16 22 In the Park Pickup Config field enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network 23 Enable the Whitelist Proxy field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the check box Def...

Page 236: ... pair of ports for each media stream The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone and is then incremented for each subsequent line available within the phone to provided each line a unique RTP port for its own use On the IP phone the initial port used as the starting point for RTP RTCP port allocation can be configured using RTP Port Base The default RTP base port on the IP phones is 30...

Page 237: ...ODEC is an acronym for COmpress DECompress It consists of a set of instructions that together implement one or more algorithms In the case of IP telephony these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data to decrease the content s file size and bit rate the amount of network bandwidth in kilobits per second required to transfer the audio With smaller file sizes and lower bit rates the ...

Page 238: ...s have also been created to configure this feature Administrators can enable the feature by using the sip amr codec payload format which specifies the payload format for AMR AMR WB AMR AMR WB can operate in either bandwidth efficient mode 0 or in octet aligned mode 1 depending on the value configured Administrators can also disable the octet align mode and still send the octet align 0 header in th...

Page 239: ...R WB codec modes and corresponding bit rates AMR Codec Modes AMR WB G 722 2 Codec Modes AMR MODE BIT RATE KBPS 0 4 75 1 5 15 2 5 90 3 6 70 4 7 40 5 7 95 6 10 2 7 12 2 AMR WB MODE BIT RATE KBPS 0 6 60 1 8 85 2 12 65 3 14 25 4 15 85 5 18 25 6 19 85 7 23 05 8 23 85 ...

Page 240: ...ed for transfer of the RTP stream You enter the ptime values for the customized codec list in milliseconds See table below Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression Voice Activity Detection VAD on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet contains useful speech data Enabling silsupp results in decreased network bandwidth by avoiding the transmission of RTP pa...

Page 241: ...729 8000 G 729 96 G726 40 8000 G 726 40 97 G726 24 8000 G 726 24 98 G726 16 8000 G 726 16 110 G711u 16000 G711u 16K 111 G711a 16000 G711a 16K 112 L16 8000 L16 8K 113 L16 16000 L16 16K 115 G726 32 8000 G 726 32 118 AMR AMR Licensed feature 119 AMR WB G 722 2 AMR WB Licensed feature 121 G 722 1 G 722 1 Leave blank for all codecs All Codec 1 only Basic Codec 1 only None Codecs 2 thru 10 only ptime in...

Page 242: ...clamped muted and DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets You can configure out of band DTMF on a global basis using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI An additional feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages You can set the DTMF method as Real TimeTransport Protocol RTP SIP INFO or both You ...

Page 243: ...es RTP secured calls and accepts both secured and non secured RTP calls If the receiving phone is not SRTP enabled it sends non secured RTP calls instead SRTP Only IP phone generates and accepts RTP secured calls only all other calls are rejected fail You can override the global setting as necessary configuring SRTP support on a per line basis This allows IP phone users to have both secured and un...

Page 244: ...remove silence suppression offer is available allowing administrators the ability to control whether or not the silence suppression attribute should be included in the Session Description Protocol SDP offer If enabled 1 the silence suppression attribute will be removed from the SDP offer If disabled 0 the attribute will not be removed from the SDP offer This parameter is disabled by default and re...

Page 245: ...fault is 3000 6 Press the Save softkey 7 Restart the phone for the change to take affect For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the SIP icon 5 Press the Call Server icon 6 In the RTP Port Base field enter an RTP port base setting Default is 3000 7 Press the Sa...

Page 246: ...y or router The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port 4 The Force RFC2833 Out of Band DTMF field is enabled by default Disable this field by unchecking the box Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out of band DTMF a...

Page 247: ...hrough Codec 10 select a preference of codecs to use on the phone Valid values are Note You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per line basis Note You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per line basis Notes 1 Setting Codec 1 to All ignores the packetization interval ptime The packetization interval setting defaults to 30 which is the default for all codecs 2 Setting Codec 1 to A...

Page 248: ...ility of enabling disabling the generation of RTCP summary reports using the SIP vq rtcpxr event package These RTCP summary reports include voice qualitystatisticsaccordingtodraft ietf sipping rtcp summary 05specificationsincludingpacket loss jitter and delay statistics as well as call quality scores When this feature is enabled an RTCP summary report is sent at the end of each call via a PUBLISH ...

Page 249: ...dials a pre configured number whenever it is off hook Depending on the configuration you specify the Autodial functions as either a hotline or as a warmline as follows Hotline default The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset Warmline The IP phone waits for a specified amount of time after you lift the handset before dialing a pre configured number If you do n...

Page 250: ...ecific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Autodial Settings on page A 123 CONFIGURING AUTODIAL USING THE MITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Mitel Web UI By default your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all lines on your IP phone However you can also configure Autodial on a per line basis G...

Page 251: ... Global Settings parameter to enable it then click Save Settings to save your changes To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line disable the Use Global Settings parameter Then proceed to step 3 3 In the Autodial Number field specify the SIP number for this line that the IP phone dials whenever the IP phone is off hook as follows If set to 1 then the global autodial settin...

Page 252: ...ed by the FTP server The TFTP setting is the default download protocol You can configure the type of protocol that the IP phones use by setting it in the configuration files the IP phone UI or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING THE CONFIGURATION SERVER PROTOCOL Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Ap...

Page 253: ...S Default is Use TFTP The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server 6 Press Set to save the changes 7 From the Configuration Server menu select from the following This selection is dependent on the Download Protocol you selected in step 6 TFTP Settings FTP Settings HTTP Settings HTTPS Settings 8 Enter the IP address of the ...

Page 254: ...t to save the change Select Alt TFTP Path Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone If the IP phone s files are located in a sub directory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ippho...

Page 255: ...ration files reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP Phone If the IP phone s files are located in a sub directory beneath the server s root directory the relative path to that sub directory should be entered in this field Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6863i configfiles Press Done or Set Select Client Method Select the client method to use ...

Page 256: ...ypad Default is 22222 4 Select Configuration Server 5 In the Download Protocol field select the protocol you want the phone to use for down loading from the configuration server Valid values are TFTP Default FTP HTTP HTTPS The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server Note For more information on configuring the HTTPS secur...

Page 257: ...col field select the protocol you want the phone to use for down loading from the configuration server Valid values are TFTP Default FTP HTTP HTTPS The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server 6 After selecting the download protocol you must identify specific parameters for that specific protocol IP PHONE UI Note If requir...

Page 258: ...Optional You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required by entering them in the FTP Username and FTP Password fields HTTP SETTINGS In the HTTP Server field enter the IP address of the HTTP server In the HTTP Port field enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP Default is 80 In the HTTP Path field enter the path name fo...

Page 259: ...uration Server Protocol 4 106 1 Click on Advanced Settings Configuration Server 2 Select the protocol from the Download Protocol list box Valid values are TFTP FTP HTTP and HTTPS Default is TFTP MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 260: ... the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6867i configfiles Optional You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required Enter a username for a user that will access the FTP server in the FTP User Name field Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the FTP Password field HTTP Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the...

Page 261: ...guration Server Protocol 4 108 3 Click Save Settings to save your settings 4 Select Operation Reset and click Restart Note The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings ...

Page 262: ...Chapter 5 CONFIGURING OPERATIONAL FEATURES ...

Page 263: ...Setting page 5 17 Time and Date page 5 18 Backlight Mode page 5 32 Display page 5 33 Background Image on Idle Screen page 5 35 Configurable Home Idle Screen Modes page 5 36 Configurable Home Idle Screen Font Color page 5 39 Screen Saver page 5 40 Picture ID Feature page 5 41 Audio DHSG Headset page 5 42 USB Headset Support page 5 45 Audio Hi Q on G 722 Calls page 5 46 Audio Mode Configuration page...

Page 264: ...g Intercom with Auto Answer and Barge In page 5 102 Group Paging RTP Settings page 5 105 Speeddial Key Mapping page 5 108 Send DTMF for Remapping Conference or Redial Key page 5 110 Ring Tones and Tone Sets page 5 111 Custom Ring Tones page 5 123 Ring Tone via Speaker During Active Calls page 5 125 No Service Congestion Tone page 5 125 Priority Alerting page 5 126 Directed Call Pickup BLF or XML C...

Page 265: ...iting Indicator MWI page 5 208 Shared Call Appearance SCA Call Bridging page 5 210 Park Pick Up Static and Programmable Configuration page 5 214 Last Call Return LCR Sylantro Servers page 5 224 Call Forwarding page 5 225 Configuring Call Forward via the IP Phone UI 6867i 6869i 6873i page 5 240 SIP Phone Diversion Display page 5 246 Display Name Customization page 5 247 Displaying Call Destination ...

Page 266: ...ustom Ad Hoc Conference page 5 312 SIP Join Feature for 3 Way Conference page 5 312 Conference Transfer Support for Live Dial Mode page 5 313 Authentication Support for HTTP HTTPS Download Methods used with BroadSoft Client Management System CMS page 5 314 Customizing the Display Columns on the M685i Expansion Module page 5 316 TOPIC PAGE ...

Page 267: ... A the section Password Settings on page A 15 For the 6863i 6865i 5 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 6 Select User Password 7 Enter the current user password 8 Press Enter 9 Enter the new user password 10 Press Enter 11 Re enter the new user password 12 Press Enter A message Password Changed displays on the screen Note The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords If you e...

Page 268: ...word 6 In the Re enter Password field re enter the user password 7 Press Save 1 Click on Operation User Password 2 In the Current Password field enter the current user password 3 In the New Password field enter the new user password 4 In the Password Confirm field enter the new user password again 5 Click Save Settings to save your changes RESETTING A USER PASSWORD If a user forgets his password e...

Page 269: ...strator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP phone You turn this feature on and off by entering the options password enabled parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files Valid values are 0 false Options key not password protected or 1 true Options key password protected If this parameter is set to 1 a user has to enter a password at the IP phone UI If th...

Page 270: ... at the path Options Lock Using the Mitel Web UI via the path Operation Phone Lock Using the configuration files to configure a softkey as phonelock and then pressing the key to lock unlock the phone Using the Mitel Web UI to configure a softkey as Phone Lock and then pressing the key to lock unlock the phone LOCKING UNLOCKING THE PHONE USING THE IP PHONE UI Use the following IP Phone UI procedure...

Page 271: ... An Enter Unlock Password prompt displays 2 Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 A prompt Unlock the Phone displays 3 Select Yes to unlock the phone For the 6873i Lock the phone 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Lock icon 3 Press the Phone Lock icon The prompt Lock the phone displays 4 Press Yes to lock the phone Unlock the phone 1 Pres...

Page 272: ...phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message Phone is unlocked CONFIGURING A LOCK UNLOCK KEY USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES Using the configuration files you can configure a key on the phone softkey programmable key or expansion module key to use as a lock unlock key In the configuration files you assign the function of the key as phonelock Use the following procedure to configure a...

Page 273: ... the following procedure to configure a key as a lock unlock key using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module N 2 Select a key you want to configure for locking unlocking the phone 3 In the Type field select Phone Lock from the list of options 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes Using the Configur...

Page 274: ... softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp go OFF The Lock label appears next to the softkey you just pressed For the 6867i 6869i Lock the phone 1 Press the Lock softkey The phone locks The message Phone is Locked displays on the screen Unlock the phone 1 Press the Unlock softkey A password prompt displays 2 Enter the user or administrator password and press the button or Enter softkey Default is 22222...

Page 275: ...n the dial pad when required and the phone automatically dials to those emergency services The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones EMERGENCY DIAL PLAN AND PATTERN MATCHING The IP Phones support emergency dialing using pattern matching Pattern matching is only functional when a line is seized before the number is dialed i e when a user dials by selecting a line ...

Page 276: ...ial tone is not supported when defining an emergency dial plan When the live dialpad feature is enabled and a user dials a number using a Speeddial key the whole string is examined against the dial plan The speeddial number will only be dialed if the number matches the rules of the dial plan exactly i e if the speeddial is an exact match the call will go through if the speeddial number is a candid...

Page 277: ...witches to speakerphone mode ensuring that the call is still active Alternatively if the handset is taken off hook the phone automatically switches to handset mode All softkey and hardkey events e g hold conference transfer end call park mute etc are disabled as they may impede or be disruptive to the active call The phone does not allow for the origination or termination of any call while the pho...

Page 278: ...xx in the example above before sending out the SIP packet The SIP packet header omits the user parameter user ip i e To sip 645 10 30 102 24 10060 identifying the number as one from an IP network If the number that was dialed was 456 2345 the phone tries to match the number to the dial plan before sending out the SIP packet but as it is not part of the dial plan thephoneidentifiesthenumberasaPSTNn...

Page 279: ...r the Mitel Web UI The following table identifies which method of configuration applies to each feature DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME DST INFORMATION The Mitel IP Phones incorporate the federally mandated DST observance change This change became affective starting in 2007 The US has made a change to its daylight savings time observance starting in 2007 The Energy Policy Act of 2005 mandates that DST will ...

Page 280: ...ime for EST time zone name Custom The following table identifies the additional time zone and DST parameters you can enter in the configuration files Note DST can be set on the phones using the IP Phone UI and configuration files only For more information see Time Zone DST on page 5 19 CUSTOM CONFIGURATION FILE PARAMETER DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE time zone minutes The number of minutes the time zone is ...

Page 281: ...id values are an integer from 0 midnight to 23 dst end hour 23 RELATIVE TIME dst start month The month that DST starts Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December dst start month 4 dst end month The month that DST ends Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December dst end month 5 dst start week The week in the specified month in which DST starts Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1...

Page 282: ...h dst end week 1 dst start day The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST starts on Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7 1 Sunday 2 Monday 7 Saturday dst start day 2 dst end day The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7 1 Sunday 2 Monday 7 Saturday dst end day 7 dst start hour The hour that DST starts Valid v...

Page 283: ...d week 1 first full week dst end day 1 Sunday DHCP TIME OFFSET OPTION 2 SUPPORT DHCP Option 42 enables the phone to be configured with the Network Time Protocol NTP server addresses However NTP provides the Coordinated Universal Time UTC time so the phone requires the offset from UTC in order to deliver the correct local time A User or Administrator can set the offset of UTC using DHCP Option 2 An...

Page 284: ...Network Time Protocol NTP server addresses However NTP provides the Coordinated Universal Time UTC time so the phone requires the offset from UTC in order to deliver the correct local time On the IP Phone UI for 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones a User or Administrator can select Time and Date Time Zone Others and choose Custom from the displayed time zone list On the IP Phone UI for 6863i and 6865i...

Page 285: ...IGURING TIME AND DATE USING THE IP PHONE UI Use the following procedure to set a time and date time and date format time zone and daylight savings time using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List Set Time Format 2 Select Time and Date 3 Select Time Format Valid values are 12 Hour and 24 Hour 4 Use the navigation keys to select the preferred time format ...

Page 286: ... Select Daylight Savings 14 Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options Valid values are OFF 30 min summertime 1 hr summertime automatic 15 Press Done to save the Daylight Savings value you selected For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List Note The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD Day of Week Month Day Note For more information about setting the time zone to DP Dhcp or Cu...

Page 287: ... Savings highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 7 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired daylight savings setting Valid values are Off 30 min summertime 1h summertime Automatic default Set Date Format 8 Press the 3 key to move to back to the options column and press the 4 key to highlight Date Format 9 With Date Format highlighted press the 4 key to move to ...

Page 288: ...column 15 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the time zone that applies to your area The default time zone is US Eastern 16 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter the Options List Set Time Format 2 Press the Time and Date icon 3 Press the Settings icon 4 Choose the desired time format Valid values are 12 Hour and 24 Hour the default is 12 Hour Set...

Page 289: ...Zone icon A list of time zones displays for different areas of the world 13 Select the desired region Valid values are America Asia Atlantic Australia Europe Pacific Others 14 Choose the time zone that applies to your area The default time zone is US Eastern 15 Press the Save softkey to save your changes CONFIGURING TIME AND DATE USING THE MITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to set a time and...

Page 290: ...D DD MMM YYYY WWW DD MMM DD MMM DD MM YYYY 4 Click Save Settings to save your changes TIME SERVERS A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network The time server may be a local network time server or an Internet time server The Network Time Protocol NTP is the most widely used protocol that distribut...

Page 291: ...t the IP Address of Time Servers 1 2 and or 3 For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Preferences Time and Date 3 Select Timer Server 1 Time Server 2 and or Time Server 3 4 Enter the IP address of theTime Server in dotted decimal format Use the available softkeys to help you enter the information 5 Click Done to save your changes For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to e...

Page 292: ...me Server Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1 2 and or 3 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Time and Date Setting To enable disable Time Server 2 The NTP Time Server field is enabled by default If you need to disable the Time Server uncheck the box The Time Server 1 2 and 3 fields are grayed out when disab...

Page 293: ... THE CONFIGURATION FILES Use the following information to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the IP Phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Backlight Mode Settings on page A 60 CONFIGURING THE BACKLIGHT MODE USING THE IP PHONE UI Use the following procedure to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the IP Phone using the IP...

Page 294: ... Display option on the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones allows you to set the following on your phone Brightness Level Brightness Timer BRIGHTNESS LEVEL The Brightness Level option allows you to set the amount of light that illuminates the LCD display Use this option to set your preference of brightness SETTING BRIGHTNESS For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Displ...

Page 295: ... 60 seconds of inactivity the LCD backlight goes off SETTING BRIGHTNESS TIMER For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Display option and press the button or Select softkey 3 Press the 2 key to navigate to the Brightness Timer setting 4 Enter a value in seconds using the dialpad keys You can set the timer from 1 to 36000 seconds Default is 600 10 minutes 5 Press the ...

Page 296: ...t text i e screen name extension and date time and softkeys on the idle screen are displayed on top of the background image The background image can be downloaded from your configuration server using either tftp ftp http and https protocols IDLE SCREEN IMAGE REQUIREMENTS 320x240 pixels 6867i 480x272 pixels 6869i 800x480 pixels 6873i 24 or 32 bit color depth 1MB maximum file size Both jpg and png f...

Page 297: ...us bar The secondary screen mode displays both the Screen Name and Screen Name 2 parameters They are displayed above the smaller repositioned date and time Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only Note Screen Name 2 sip screen name 2 is not displayed on the 6867i 6869i 6873i IP phone s screen when the primary screen mode is configured for use 6867i Primary Home Idle Screen Mode ...

Page 298: ...ministrators can switch the home idle screen to the preferred layout by defining the idle screen mode parameter in the configuration files or by navigating to the Display options menu on the phone 6873i Primary Home Idle Screen Mode 6873i Secondary Home Idle Screen Mode ...

Page 299: ... the following procedure to switch the 6867i 6869i 6873i IP phones home idle screen mode using the IP Phone UI For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Display option and press the button or Select softkey 3 With Home Screen Mode highlighted press the 3 or 4 key to change to the desired mode 4 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter...

Page 300: ...ed when using a dark colored background image while black or Mitel blue provides the contrast required when using a light colored background image CONFIGURING THE HOME IDLE SCREEN FONT COLOR USING THE CON FIGURATION FILES Use the following parameter to configure the home idle screen font color For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Home Idle Scree...

Page 301: ...rable through the phone s UI or by defining the screen save time parameter in the configuration files CONFIGURING THE SCREEN SAVER TIMER USING THE CONFIGURATI ON FILES Use the following parameter to configure the screen saver timer For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Screen Saver Settings on page A 63 Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873...

Page 302: ...00 seconds 5 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Press the Display icon 3 Press the Screen Saver Timer field 4 Enter in the desired amount of time in seconds the phone must be idle before the screen saver is initiated The range is 0 screensaver disabled to 7200 seconds with a default of 1800 seconds 5 Press the Save softkey to save your cha...

Page 303: ...pecific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Picture ID Feature on page A 64 AUDIO DHSG HEADSET DHSG is a standard for telecommunication headsets The 6865i 6867i and 6869i IP Phones support the use of a DHSG headset Use of a non verified DHSG headset solution is at the customer s own discretion and the customer should be aware that some DHSG headsets require...

Page 304: ... the location Options Preferences Set Audio DHSG in the IP Phone UI Default for DHSG is disabled OFF Configuring DHSG Using the Configuration Files Use the following information to configure the use of a DHSG headset on the IP Phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section DHSG Settings on page A 65 WARNING 1 THE HEADSET PORT IS FOR HEADSET USE ONL...

Page 305: ...e your setting 6 Press Set or Done to save your setting The setting applies immediately to the phone For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Audio Headset option and press the button or Select softkey 3 Press the 2 key to highlight DHSG 4 With DHSG highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 5 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose whether or ...

Page 306: ...es Users can simply plug in the supported USB headset into the USB input port located on the back of their phones and configure the phone s audio mode accordingly e g Headset Speaker Headset or Headset Speaker to start using their USB headset Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only 6867i 6869i USB Input Port Location 6873i USB Input Port Location ...

Page 307: ...or handsfree speakerphone In handset audio mode pressing the handsfree button on the phone switches to handsfree speakerphone In Speaker audio mode lift the handset to switch to the handset 1 Headset Choose this setting if you want to make or receive all calls using a handset or headset For the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i calls can be switched from the handset to headset by pressing the handsfree ...

Page 308: ...option on the IP phone turns the Live Dial Pad mode ON or OFF With live dial pad ON the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed With live dial pad OFF if you dial a number while the phone is on hook lifting the receiver or pressing the Speaker Headset button initiates a call to that number Availability of feature dependent on you...

Page 309: ...he Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Press the Dialpad icon 3 Press the Live Dialpad icon 4 Choose On to enable or Off to disable the live dialpad feature 5 Press the Save softkey to save your changes LIVE KEYBOARD When the 6867i 6869i SIP phone is in an idle state and a alphabetic character key on an attached K680i keyboard is pressed the default ...

Page 310: ...ey on an attached K680i keyboard on the home idle screen will launch the XML application and pass the character to the XML application first input field if available For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files seeAppendixA the section Live Keyboard Settings on page A 66 Note Irrespective of whether the Live Keyboard feature is enabled or disabled pressing a numerical key on the ...

Page 311: ...in a specific language as required When you set the language to use all of the display screens menus services options configuration parameters etc display in that language The IP phones support the following languages IP PHONE UI Note The Live Keyboard setting is only available in this menu if a K680i keyboard is attached to the phone AVAILABLE LANGUAGE ASSOCIATED LANGUAGE FILE INCLUDED IN THE FIR...

Page 312: ... ISO 639 see Appendix A the section Language Codes from Standard ISO 639 on page 195 and ISO 3166 is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166 see Country Codes from Standard ISO 3166 on page 196 The ISO 3166 attribute is optional Galego lang_gl txt Hungarian lang_hu txt Italian lang_it txt Dutch lang_nl txt Dutch Netherlands lang_nl_nl txt Norwegian lang_no txt Polish ASCII lang_pl txt Poli...

Page 313: ...ying the Screen Language to Use on page 5 52 For more information about language codes and country codes see Appendix A the section Language Pack Settings on page 193 Loading Language Packs via the Mitel Web UI Using the Mitel Web UI you can specify a language pack to load using the parameters at Basic Settings Preferences Language Settings You use the following fields in the Mitel Web UI to speci...

Page 314: ...on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Language Settings on page A 191 and Language Pack Settings on page A 193 CONFIGURATION FILES Notes 1 If you specify the language to use on the phone via the configuration files you must reboot the phone for the changes to take affect 2 All languages may not be available for selection The avail...

Page 315: ...ist 2 Navigate to the Language option and press the button or Select softkey 3 With Screen Language highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 4 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired screen language 5 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Press the Language icon 3 Choose the desired screen language 4 Press...

Page 316: ...y the Mitel Web UI in the respective language lang_ca txt Catalan lang_ca_va txt Valencian lang_cs txt Czech UTF 8 lang_cs_op txt Czech ASCII lang_cy txt Welsh lang_de txt German lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_da txt Danish lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu txt Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl txt Gale...

Page 317: ...ipts can now be done in various languages using the keypad on the phone The System Administrator and User can enable this feature using the Mitel Web UI or the IP Phone UI An Administrator can also use the configuration files to enable this feature Users can then use text and characters in a specific language when performing inputs on the phone The following tables identify the language characters...

Page 318: ...ASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2 abc2 3 DEF3 def3 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6 mno6 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8 tuv8 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÀÂÇÁÅÆ abc2àâçáåæ 3 DEF3ÉÈÊË def3éèêë 4 GHI4ÎÏ ghi4îï 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÑÓÒÔÖ mno6ñóòôö 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÙÛÜ tuv8úùûü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 319: ...Ç abc2áàç 3 DEF3ÉÈ def3éè 4 GHI4ÏÍ ghi4ïí 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÑÓÒ mno6ñóò 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÜ tuv8úü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÄÀ abc2äà 3 DEF3É def3é 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6Ö mno6ö 7 PQRS7ß pqrs7ß 8 TUV8Ü tuv8ü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 320: ...1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÀCÇ abc2àcç 3 DEF3ÉÈË def3éèë 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÓÒ mno6óò 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8Ù tuv8ù 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÁÀÂÃÇ abc2áàâãç 3 DEF3ÉÊ def3éê 4 GHI4Í ghi4í 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÓÔÕ mno6óôõ 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÜ tuv8úü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 321: ...Дeëжз3def 4 ИЙКЛ4GHI ийкл4ghi 5 МНОП5JKL мноп5jkl 6 РСТУ6MNO рсту6mno 7 ФХЦЧ7PQRS фхЧч7pqrs 8 ШЩЪЫ8TUV шщъы8tuv 9 ЬЗЮЯ9WXYZ ьзюя9wxyz SPACE SPACE KEY UPPERCASE CHARACTERS LOWERCASE CHARACTERS 0 0 0 1 1 _ 1 _ 2 ABC2ÅÄÆÀ abc2åäæà 3 DEF3É def3é 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÖØ mno6öø 7 PQRS7ß pqrs7ß 8 TUV8Ü tuv8ü 9 WXYZ9 wxyz9 SPACE SPACE ...

Page 322: ...s on page A 191 Configuring Language Input Using the IP Phone UI Once Language Input is enabled an Administrator or User can change the input language on the phone using the IP Phone UI The Input Language option appears under the Language option in the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to change the input language using the IP Phone UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Op...

Page 323: ... softkey 3 Press the 2 key to highlight the Input Language option 4 With Input Language highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 5 Use the 5 and 2 keys to scroll through and choose the desired input language Valid values are English default Français French Español Spanish Deutsch German Italiano Italian Português Portuguese Русский Russian Nordic ελληνικά Greek 6 Press the Save soft...

Page 324: ...Use the following procedure to set the input language using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Language Settings 2 Select a language from the Input Language field Setting this field allows you to specify the language to use when entering text in the Mitel Web UI IP Phone UI or in XML applications on the phone Valid values are English default Français French Español Spanish Deut...

Page 325: ...Latin2 of multi national languages when displaying and inputting in the IP Phone UI and the Mitel Web UI UTF 8 is also compatible with XML encoding on the IP Phones The following table illustrates the Latin 2 character set now used on the IP Phones MINIMUM RINGER VOLUME To prevent the user from turning off the ringer an Administrator can configure a parameter called ringer volume minimum to set th...

Page 326: ...ing parameters impact existing softkey and programmable key parameters defined in the configuration files as detailed in the table below CONFIGURATION FILES Notes 1 If no settings are configured locally but the key type is defined in a configuration file the phone will lock the respective key with the type defined in the configuration file along with any values associated with the additional key p...

Page 327: ...o from the Received Callers List It also allows you to save speeddial information to a programmable key You can also use the Save key while using specific XML applications The Delete key allows you to remove entries from the Local Directory List and Received Callers List Must enter the Directory or Received Callers List and select an entry then press twice to delete entry By default the Save and D...

Page 328: ...bes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone number Access codes area codes specialized codes and combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan For instance the North American Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN uses a 10 digit dial plan that includes a 3 digit area code and a 7 digit telephone number Most PBXs support variable...

Page 329: ... e when a user dials by selecting a line going off hook before entering the number or if the user dials by any method with the live dialpad feature enabled or when dialing using a Speeddial key SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Digit symbol Allows a secondary dial tone to be audible before dialing a number X Match any digit symbol wildcard Other keypad symbol Expression inclusive OR 0 or more...

Page 330: ... beginning with 1 and terminated with 6XXX 579 Prepends 579 to any 4 digit string starting with 6 4 6 XXXXXX 78 Prepends 78 to any 7 digit string starting with 4 5 or 6 Example If you enter the following dial string for a local dial plan sip dial plan 1 9 where 9 is the prepended digit and you dial the following number 15551212 Notes 1 If the phone is locked dialed numbers are matched against the ...

Page 331: ...keys before the timeout occurs SECONDARY DIAL TONE The IP phones support a feature that allows the user to dial a predefined dial string obtain a dial tone and continue dialing A User or Administrator can configure this using the existing Dial Plan feature on the phone You can enter a new character string in the dial plan that allows you to configure the secondary dial tone The character string is...

Page 332: ...Local Dial Plan field enter a valid local dial plan up to 512 alphanumeric charac ters for the IP phone Default is X XX Enter prepended digits or a to present a secondary dial tone if required 3 Enable the Send Dial Plan Terminator field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box Default is disabled 4 In the Digit Timeout in seconds field enter a timeout value This is the l...

Page 333: ...ayback on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Suppress DTMF Playback Setting on page A 203 DISPLAY DTMF DIGITS A feature on the IP phones allows administrators to enable or disable DTMF dual tone multi frequency digits to display to the IP phone when using the keypad to dial or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key DTMF i...

Page 334: ...e Display DTMF Digits field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box Default is disabled 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes 4 You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take effect 5 Click on Operation Reset 6 In the Restart Phone field click Restart to restart the IP phone and apply the changes FILTER OUT INCOMING DTMF EVENTS An Administrator can enter a p...

Page 335: ...rward Busy or Call Forward No Answer and Busy is configured on the phone It will then forward the call according to the rule configured The phone can only transfer the currently active call or accept transferred calls if there is no active calls If call waiting is disabled intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected pre dialing with live dialpad disabled still accepts inc...

Page 336: ... Settings Configure Global Call Waiting 3 The Call Waiting field is enabled by default To disable call waiting on a global basis uncheck this box Configure Per Line Call Waiting 4 The Call Waiting field is set to Global by default To enable call waiting for a specific line select enabled from the list in this field To disable call waiting for a specific line select disabled from the list in this f...

Page 337: ...u of that incoming call A User or Administrator can configure this feature using the Mitel Web UI An Administrator can also configure this feature using the configuration files Configuring Call Waiting Tone Use the following procedures to configure the Call Waiting Tone feature on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Call Waiting Se...

Page 338: ... value of 0 is the default and plays the call waiting tone only once on the active call When the incoming caller hangs up the call waiting tone stops on the existing active call You can enable or disable this feature in the configuration files or in the Mitel Web UI Configuring Call Waiting Tone Period You use the following procedures to enable or disable Call Waiting Tone Period For specific para...

Page 339: ...dible on an active call when another call comes in Default is 0 seconds When enabled the call waiting tone plays at regular intervals for the amount of time set for this parameter For example if set to 30 the call waiting tone plays every 30 seconds When set to 0 the call waiting tone is audible only once on the active call 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 340: ...NG STUTTERED DIAL TONE Use the following procedures to configure stuttered dial tone on the IP phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling stuttered dial tone see Appendix A the section Stuttered Dial Tone Setting on page A 180 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 The Stuttered Dial Tone field is enabled by default To disable this field u...

Page 341: ...r has set a value for this feature in a custom XML application or in the configuration files the value you set in the Mitel Web UI overrides theAdministrator s setting Setting and saving the value in the Mitel Web UI applies to the phone immediately REFERENCE For more information about enabling disabling the XML Beep Support in an XML script see XML Customized Services on page 5 276 CONFIGURING XM...

Page 342: ...Release 4 2 0 Administrator Guide 5 81 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 The XML Beep Support field is enabled by default To disable this field uncheck the box 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 343: ...age You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI REFERENCE For more information about configuring the status scroll delay for XML status messages see XML Customized Services on page 5 276 CONFIGURING STATUS SCROLL DELAY Use the following procedures to configure Status Scroll Delay For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files seeAppendixA the secti...

Page 344: ...m You can turn off this functionality so that the phone now stays focused on the connected call You can do this using the switch focus to ringing line parameter in the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING SWITCH FOCUS TO RINGING LINE You use the following procedures to enable or disable Switch Focus to Ringing Line For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for e...

Page 345: ...ure is enabled and the call on Line 1 is on hold and then the User answers a call on Line 2 and stays on that line a reminder tone is played in the active audio path on Line 2 to remind the User that there is still a call on hold on Line 1 When this feature is disabled a ring splash is heard when the active call hangs up and there is still a call on hold Your can enable or disable this feature usi...

Page 346: ...s on page A 176 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 In the Call Hold Reminder During Active Calls field enable this feature by placing a check mark in the box When this feature is enabled a reminder tone is heard on the active call when another call is on hold When disabled a ring splash is heard when the active call hangs up and there is still a call on hold 3 Click Save Settings to s...

Page 347: ...when no other calls are active on the phone When enabled the phone initiates a reminder ring splash periodically for the single call on hold When disabled no reminder ring splash is audible You can enable or disable this feature using the call hold reminder parameter in the configuration files or in the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING CALL HOLD REMINDER You use the following procedure to enable or disabl...

Page 348: ...call and have placed another call on hold You can configure these parameters using the configuration files only CONFIGURING CALL HOLD REMINDER TIMER You use the following procedure to configure the Call Hold Reminder Timer For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for setting the Call Hold Reminder Timer see Appendix A the section Call Hold Reminder Settings on page A 176 C...

Page 349: ...ely after the call ends Conference For incoming calls the phone switches back immediately after the call ends Transfer For incoming or outgoing calls the current behavior is that the same line used to transfer the call does not change For incoming calls the phone switches back immediately after the call transfers BLF The phone switches back immediately after the call ends Park The phone switches b...

Page 350: ...ed line to switch focus to after incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone Valid values are None disables the preferred line focus feature 1 to N Default is 1 For example if you set the preferred line to 1 when a call incoming or outgoing ends on the phone on any line the phone switches focus back to Line 1 3 In the Preferred Line Timeout field enter the amount of time in seconds that the phone ...

Page 351: ...ngs up the active call For the 6863i 6865i If you disable this parameter and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present the Ignore option displays in the LCD window The phone will ignore the incoming call if you press the DOWN arrow navigation key The phone will hang up on the active call if you press the Goodbye key You can set this parameter using the configuration fi...

Page 352: ...during an incoming call the phone rejects the incoming call with a status code of 486 Busy Here The IP phones allow an administrator to configure this status code You can configure the status code using the configuration files only Use the following parameter to configure a status code when ignoring incoming calls sip ignore status code Configuring Status Codes on Ignoring Incoming Calls You can u...

Page 353: ...cemail is pending on line 2 If you configure the MWI LED for all lines the LED illuminates if a voicemail is pending on any line on the phone lines 1 through N A User can configure the MWI using the Mitel Web UI only An Administrator can configure the MWI on single or all lines using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING MESSAGE WAITING INDICATOR MWI Use the following procedures ...

Page 354: ... Indicator Line field select a single line from 1 to N or select All for all lines If you select a single line the MWI illuminates when a voicemail message is pending on that line If you select all lines the MWI illuminates when a voicemail message is pending on any line from 1 to N 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 355: ... do not disturb based on the accounts on the phone all accounts or a specific account You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND The three modes you can set on the phone for DND are Account Phone Custom An Administrator or User can set the DND mode using the Mitel Web UI at the path Basic Settings Preferences General DND Key Mode AnAdministrator can also set the DND Ke...

Page 356: ...to use on the phone Valid values are Account Sets DND for a specific account DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI to ON or OFF Phone Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF Custom Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key that list the account s on the phone The user can select a specific account ...

Page 357: ...n you configure the initial account the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts In the Mitel Web UI only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration Using the Mitel Web UI if you make changes to that initial account the changes apply to all accounts on the phone Custom mode The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for ...

Page 358: ...uration files see Appendix A the section Call Forward Key Mode Settings on page A 157 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences General 2 In the Call Forward Key Mode field select a call forward mode to use on the phone Valid values are Account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus CONFIGURATION FILES MITEL W...

Page 359: ...NTIFICATION NUMBER ELIN TheIPPhonessupportLinkLayerDiscoveryProtocolforMediaEndpointDevices LLDP MED LLDP MED is designed to allow for things such as Auto discoveryofLANpolicies suchasVLAN Layer2PriorityandDiffservsettings leading to plug and play networking Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints Inventory management allowing network administrators to track their ...

Page 360: ...DP MED responses when the phone is booting up If LLDP MED responses are received after this initial listening period the phone will ignore the response Administrators can configure this time out interval using the lldp startinterval parameter This parameter is only valid during the phone bootup process and it will control the LLDP MED time out interval where the phone sends LLDP MED advertisements...

Page 361: ...r Disabled This field enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices LLDP MED on the IP Phone 7 Press DONE to save the change For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password using the keypad Default is 22222 4 Select Network LLDP This option enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Medi...

Page 362: ...e to configure LLDP MED using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Network Advanced Network Settings 2 The LLDP field is enabled by default To disable LLDP click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark 3 In the LLDP Packet Interval field enter the time in seconds between the transmission of LLDP Data Unit LLDPDU packets The value of zero 0 disables this parameter Valid values ar...

Page 363: ... being placed while a server side intercom call means the SIP server is responsible for informing the recipient Server side calls require additional configuration of a prefix code After pressing the Icom button and if required entering the number to call the phone automatically adds the prefix to the called number and sends the outgoing call via the server For outgoing intercom calls an administra...

Page 364: ...wered The absence of the parameter is considered as ring forever In order for the delay functionality to operate you must first enable Auto Answer on the IP Phone Allow Barge In You can configure whether or not the IP phone allows an incoming intercom call to interrupt an active call The sip intercom allow barge in parameter controls this feature When you enable the sip intercom allow barge in par...

Page 365: ...on Incoming Intercom Settings on page A 205 Outgoing intercom Settings 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Outgoing Intercom Settings 2 Select an Intercom type for outgoing Intercom calls from the Type list box Valid values are Phone Side Server Side Off Default is Off 3 If Server Side is selected enter a prefix to add to the phone number in the Prefix Code field Note To configure incoming inter...

Page 366: ... the box 10 The Allow Barge In field is enabled by default If an active line on the phone receives an incoming intercom call the active call is put on hold and the phone automatically answers the incoming intercom call To disable this field uncheck the box 11 Click Save Settings to save your changes GROUP PAGING RTP SETTINGS AnAdministrator or User can configure a specific key softkey programmable...

Page 367: ...D to ignore any incoming pages For incoming RTP multicasts the ringing display is dependent on the Allow Barge In parameter as per the following rules If the Allow Barge In parameter is disabled and there is not other call on the phone then the paging is automatically played via the preferred audio device see the Model Spe cific SIP Phone User Guide for setting Audio Mode on the phone If there is ...

Page 368: ... A the section Codec Negotiation Behavior on page A 207 Use the following procedure to configure RTP streaming for Paging applications using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Group Paging RTP Settings 2 In the Paging Listen Addresses text box enter the multicast IP address es and port number s on which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets 3 Click on Softkeys an...

Page 369: ...on and return to the idle screen SPEEDDIAL KEY MAPPING There are hard keys on your phone such as Hold Redial Xfer and Conf that are configured by default for specific call handling features See the Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide for more information about these key functions ENABLING DISABLING REDIAL XFER AND CONF KEYS You can enable or disable the Redial Xfer and Conf keys as required using ...

Page 370: ...rence keys on the IP phone to use as Speeddial keys When the Redial or Conference key is pressed the number configured for the key automatically speeddials If no number is configured the Redial and Conference keys return to their original functionality You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedures to set the Redial and Conf keys as Sp...

Page 371: ... phone is idle During an active call the phone will send the custom number as DTMF using the phone configured DTMF method inbound vs out of band RFC2833 vs SIP INFO This feature can be configured using the new map redial as dtmf and map conf as dtmf parameters When a user presses the Redial key the mapped number will be sent out as DTMF during an active call if the current map redial key to parame...

Page 372: ...ng tone sets on the IP phones RING TONES There are several distinct ring tones a user or administrator can select from to set on the IP phones You can enable disable these ring tones on a global basis or on a per line basis The following table identifies the valid settings and default values for each type of configuration method ...

Page 373: ...e 2 2 Tone 3 3 Tone 4 4 Tone 5 5 Silent 6 Tone 7 7 Tone 8 8 Tone 9 9 Tone 10 10 Tone 11 11 Tone 12 12 Tone 13 13 Tone 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring Tone 3 103 Custom Ring Tone 4 104 Custom Ring Tone 5 105 Custom Ring Tone 6 106 Custom Ring Tone 7 107 Custom Ring Tone 8 Global 0 tone 1 ...

Page 374: ...one 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring Tone 3 103 Custom Ring Tone 4 104 Custom Ring Tone 5 105 Custom Ring Tone 6 106 Custom Ring Tone 7 107 Custom Ring Tone 8 Per Line 1 global IP Phone UI Global Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Tone 6 Tone 7 Tone 8 Tone 9 Tone 10 Tone 11 Tone 12 Tone 13 Tone 14 Tone 15 Silent Custom Ring Tones 1 8 if availabl...

Page 375: ...ne 8 Tone 9 Tone 10 Tone 11 Tone 12 Tone 13 Tone 14 Tone 15 Silent Custom Ring Tones 1 8 if available Per Line Global Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Tone 6 Tone 7 Tone 8 Tone 9 Tone 10 Tone 11 Tone 12 Tone 13 Tone 14 Tone 15 Silent Custom Ring Tones 1 8 if available Global Tone 1 Per Line Global ...

Page 376: ...stralia Brazil Canada Europe generic tones France Germany Italy Italy2 Malaysia Mexico Russia Slovakia UK US Default When you configure the country s tone set the country specific tone is heard on the phone for the following dial tone secondary dial tone ring tone busy tone congestion tones call waiting tone ring cadence pattern Note You configure ring tones and tone sets using the Mitel Web UI IP...

Page 377: ...0 2000 Busy 425 375 375 Congestion 425 2500 500 Call Waiting 425 200 200 200 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 400 200 400 2000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 300 100 300 1300 Ringing 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 250 250 Congestion 425 500 500 Call Waiting 425 100 100 100 10000 Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 350 440 Continuous...

Page 378: ...nging 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 200 200 Call Waiting 425 200 200 200 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 440 Continuously On Secondary Dial 340 440 Continuously On Ringing 440 1500 3500 Busy 440 500 500 Congestion 440 500 500 Call Waiting 440 300 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1500 3500 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Con...

Page 379: ...00 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 500 500 Ringing 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 200 200 Call Waiting 425 100 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 160 160 Ringing 425 50 400 200 400 2000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 250 250 Call Waiting 425 100 200 1...

Page 380: ...500 500 Congestion 425 250 250 Call Waiting 425 100 100 100 10000 Ring Cadence 1000 4000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 Continuously On Secondary Dial 425 500 50 Ringing 425 1000 4000 Busy 425 500 500 Congestion 425 200 200 Call Waiting 425 200 600 200 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 1000 5000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 425 330 330 660 660 Secondary Dial 425 165 165 165 1...

Page 381: ...350 440 750 750 Ringing 400 450 400 200 400 2000 Busy 400 375 375 Congestion 400 400 350 225 525 Call Waiting 400 100 Continuously Off Ring Cadence 400 200 400 2000 TONE FREQUENCY HZ CADENCE ON OFF MS Dial 350 440 Continuously On Secondary Dial 350 440 100 100 Continuously On Ringing 440 480 2000 4000 Busy 480 620 500 500 Congestion 480 620 240 260 Call Waiting 440 300 Continuously Off Ring Cadenc...

Page 382: ...tone set Valid values are Australia Brazil Canada Europe France Germany Italy Italy2 Ma laysia Mexico Brazil Russia Slovakia UK and US Default is US 9 Press Done to save the change The ring tone and tone set you select is immediately applied to the IP phone For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Audio Ring Tones option and press the button or Select softkey 3 Use t...

Page 383: ...ia Mexico Brazil Russia Slovakia UK and US Default is US 8 Press the Save softkey to save your changes 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences For global configuration 2 In the Ring Tones section select a country from the Tone Set field Valid values are Australia Brazil Canada Europe France Germany Italy Italy2 Ma laysia Mexico Brazil Russia Slovakia UK and US Default is US 3 Select a value from the...

Page 384: ...ngtone 2 ftp 192 168 0 50 classic wav the phone will download both WAV files from the FTP server and store beep wav in position 1 and classic wav in position 2 on the phone Note See the Ring Tone Settings Table on page 5 112 for valid values Notes 1 Ring tones must be in wav format The IP phones support the following WAV file specifications G 711 μ law and a law Codec 20 ms packet size Mono 8KHz 2...

Page 385: ...e the following procedure to install custom ring tones using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Custom Ringtones 2 Press the Browse button corresponding to the desired ring tone position e g 1 3 Navigate to the folder containing the WAV file you want to upload select the file using your left mouse button and press the Open button The filename should now be displayed to the right of the res...

Page 386: ...figuration files seeAppendixA the section Ring Tone via Speaker During Active Calls Settings on page A 175 NO SERVICE CONGESTION TONE Administrators can configure the IP phones to play a congestion fast busy tone instead of a dial tone when the phone is in a No Service state This feature allows visually impaired persons the ability to discern whether or not the phone is in service and can be used ...

Page 387: ...Asterisk BroadWorks and Sylantro servers using the configuration files and the Mitel Web UI Configuration of priority alerting is on a global basis only HOW PRIORITY ALERTING WORKS When the IP phone detects an incoming call the phone firmware inspects the INVITE request in the IP packet for an Alert Info header If it contains an Alert Info header the firmware strips out the URL and keyword paramet...

Page 388: ...ring tone pattern based on the configuration you set in the Mitel Web UI or the configuration files RING TONE PATTERNS In IP Telephony different ringing patterns have different frequencies and cadences Ring cadence is the ringing pattern heard by the called party before they pick up the call On the IP phones if you enable priority alerting when using an Asterisk or BroadWorks server the IP phone u...

Page 389: ...g default Bellcore dr2 Bellcore dr3 Bellcore dr4 Bellcore dr5 Silent BELLCORE TONE PATTERN ID PATTERN CADENCE MINIMUM DURATION MS NOMINAL DURATION MS MAXIMUM DURATION MS Standard 1 Ringing Silent 2s On 4s Off 1800 3600 2000 4000 2200 4400 Bellcore dr2 2 Ringing Silent Ringing Silent Long Long Long 630 315 630 3475 800 400 800 4000 1025 525 1025 4400 Bellcore dr3 3 Ringing Silent Ringing Silent Rin...

Page 390: ...owing procedure to configure Priority Alerting using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences 2 In the Priority Alerting Settings section enable the Enable Priority Alerting field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box For Sylantro Servers 3 Select a ring tone pattern for each of the following fields Group External Note If the Do Not Disturb DND or the Cal...

Page 391: ...indicated in the table Ring Tone Pattern Asterisk BroadWorks Servers on page 127 For Sylantro servers call waiting tones are specified by the Bellcore tones you configure in the Mitel Web UI or the configuration files See the table Ring Tone Pattern Sylantro Servers on page 128 Reference For more information about enable disabling call waiting on the IP Phone see the section Call Waiting on page 5...

Page 392: ...e ringing extension from a text menu without having to dial BLF and XML softkeys programmable keys monitor the states of an extension The extension states can be one of three states busy ringing and idle If the monitored extension is in the ringing state with an incoming call and Directed call pickup is enabled pressing the BLF or XML key can pick up the incoming call on the monitored extension RE...

Page 393: ...ted Call Pickup Settings 2 Enable the Directed Call Pickup field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box Default is disabled 3 Optional Enter a prefix in the Directed Call Pickup Prefix field For example 98 This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the BLF or BLF List softkey Notes 1 The default method for the phone to u...

Page 394: ...ers on page A 217 BLF List URI Settings on page A 256 Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF List for Directed Call Pickup in the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Directed Call Pickup Settings 2 Enable the Directed Call Pickup field by checking the check box 3 optional Enter a prefix in the Directed Call Pickup Prefix field For example 98 This prefix is appended to t...

Page 395: ... person whose extension you are monitoring if Type is BLF 9 In the Value field enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key For example for BLF the value is the extension you want to monitor For BLF List the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring 10 Click Save Settings to save your changes Note Depending on your phone model the key configuration screen...

Page 396: ...Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Basic Settings Preferences Directed Call Pickup Settings 2 Enable the Directed Call Pickup field by checking the check box 3 Optional Enter a prefix in the Directed Call Pickup Prefix field For example 98 This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from t...

Page 397: ...ys or Click on Operation Expansion Module N 6 Select a softkey or programmable key to configure 7 In the Type field select XML 8 For the 6867i 6869i 6873i Softkeys In the Label field enter the name of the person whose extension you are monitoring 9 In the Value field enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD For example http 65 205 71 13 xml startup key php user S...

Page 398: ...he BLF softkey again or Pickup key to pick up the ringing line on the BLF monitored phone or simply ignore cancel the call Configuring the Two Stage BLF Key Directed Call Pickup Feature Use the following procedure to configure the two stage BLF key directed call pickup feature in the configuration files To enable disable the two stage BLF key directed call pickup feature on the IP phone using the ...

Page 399: ...og information will be detailed in the Replaces header of the INVITE Enabling MiCloud Telepo Directed Call Pickup Support Use the following procedure to enable MiCloud Telepo directed call pickup support in the configuration files To enable MiCloud Telepo directed call pickup support using the configuration files see AppendixA the section Directed Call Pickup BLF or XML Call Interception Settings ...

Page 400: ... and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey is being used Available states you can configure for each softkey include idle The phone is not being used connected The current line is in an active call or the call is on hold incoming The phone is ringing outgoing The user is dialing a number or the far end is ringing busy The current line is busy because the line is i...

Page 401: ...ng outgoing busy DND idle connected incoming outgoing busy XML idle connected incoming outgoing busy Flash All states disabled Sprecode connected Park connected Pickup idle outgoing Last Call Return idle connected incoming outgoing busy Call Forward idle connected incoming outgoing busy Speeddial Xfer idle connected incoming outgoing busy Speeddial Conf idle connected incoming outgoing busy Direct...

Page 402: ...e shows how the keys in the example above would display on the IP Phone UI Notes 1 By default the IP phone idle screen collapses the softkeys So in the previous example softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other softkeys are set 2 A softkey type of empty does not display on the idle screen at all For more information about the softkey type of empty see Appendix A the section Softkey Settings...

Page 403: ...n configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the phones and any attached expansion module keys to perform specific functions using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI The following table identifies the available functions of the softkeys programmable keys and expansion module keys on the IP phones Available functions may vary on each model phone softkey5 not used Key 4 blank A blank d...

Page 404: ...ut For more information about speeddial prefixes see Speeddial Prefixes on page 5 165 You can also create Speeddial keys and edit the keys using the IP Phone keypad For more information about Speeddial keys and editing Speeddial keys see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide for more information Busy Lamp Field BLF blf BLF Indicates the key is configured for Busy Lamp Field BLF use A user can d...

Page 405: ...cation for accessing customized XML services You can also specify a URL for an XML key For more information on XML see the section XML Customized Services on page 5 276 Flash flash Flash Indicates the key is set to generate a flash event when it is pressed The IP phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream for example when the call is not on hold Fo...

Page 406: ...orward Indicates the key is set to be used to access the Call Forward menus on the phone For more information about call forwarding see the section Call Forwarding on page 5 225 BLF Xfer blfxfer BLF Xfer Indicates the key is set to be used as a BLF key AND as a Transfer key For more information about the BLF Xfer feature see the section BLF Xfer and Speeddial Xfer Keys on page 5 177 Speeddial Xfer...

Page 407: ...ion on the Received Callers List see the section Received Callers List on page 5 249 Outgoing Redial List redial Redial Indicates the key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List For more information about the Outgoing Redial List see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide Conference conf Conference Indicates the key is configured as a Conference key for local conferencing For Sylantro a...

Page 408: ...ck the phone For more information about the lock unlock key see Locking IP Phone Keys on page 5 65 Paging paging Paging Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol RTP stream to pre configured multicast addresses without involving SIP signaling For more information about the Paging key see Group Paging RTP Settings...

Page 409: ... Specific SIP Phone User Guide CONFIGURING SOFTKEYS AND PROGRAMMABLE KEYS Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the IP phone For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the sections Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters on page A 217 Empty Not applicable to programmable keys or expans...

Page 410: ... the Label field 5 If applicable in the Value field enter a value to associate with the softkey For example for a Speeddial value you can enter a number you want to use for the Speeddial key or 12345 as a Speeddial prefix 6 If applicable in the Line field select the line for which you want to associate the softkey 7 Some softkey types allow you to configure specific operational states Operational ...

Page 411: ...st available softkey slot position on the LCD display For example for the 6867i if top softkeys 1 through 44 are set to None on and top softkey 3 is programmed as a speeddial softkey with the label Home after saving the settings the Home speeddial softkey will appear on the first top softkey position on the LCD display Administrators now have the option to configure programmed softkey positioning ...

Page 412: ...set parametersuchas collapsedsoftkeyscreenoffsetbottom 4 isdefined thefirstfourbottom softkeys will not be taken into consideration when collapsing i e essentially locking the first four bottom softkeys and collapsing the rest Alternatively the inverse is true whereby if the collapsed softkey screen parameter is disabled i e defined as 0 and an offset parameter such as collapsed softkey screen off...

Page 413: ...e configuration file for the phone contains the following defined parameters collapsed softkey screen 0 collapsed softkey screen offset top 0 collapsed softkey screen offset bottom 4 the phone would lock all the top softkeys i e 1 44 collapse bottom softkeys 1 4 and lock the rest of the bottom softkeys i e 5 24 Alternatively If the configuration file for the phone contains the following defined pa...

Page 414: ...s outgoing ringing connected hold This feature is configured by defining the collapsed context user softkey screen parameter as 0 disabled or 1 enabled in the configuration files For Example During a call on a 6869i IP phone with the collapsed context user softkey screen parameter disabled and with softkey 1 configured as Park the softkey will not appear on page 1 The user has to press the More ke...

Page 415: ...the 6867i has a total of six physical top softkey buttons and four physical bottom softkey buttons By default when a total of six top softkeys and four bottom softkeys are configured the screen displays five top softkeys and three bottom softkeys along with More options to access the remaining softkeys By enabling the collapsed more softkey screen parameter in the scenario above the More softkey i...

Page 416: ... on the IP phones can be used to store speeddial numbers that are dialed out when a user presses and holds the respective key These press and hold speeddial numbers can be configured using the IP phone UI the Mitel Web UI or by defining the pnhkeypadN value and pnhkeypadN line parameters in the configuration files CONFIGURING PRESS AND HOLD SPEEDDIAL KEYPAD KEYS You can program one speeddial numbe...

Page 417: ...eld enter the speeddial number 4 In the Line field select the line number you want the phone to use when dialing the speeddial number 5 Click Save Settings HARD KEY REPROGRAMMING Administrators have the ability to reprogram a number of the IP phone s hard keys depending on the model with any one of the phone s softkey functions ...

Page 418: ...ted above in red is not supported 2 Hard keys are only configurable using the configuration files hardkey1 Default type line Default line 1 hardkey2 Default type line Default line 2 hardkey1 Default type line Default line 1 hardkey2 Default type line Default line 2 hardkey3 Default type redial hardkey4 Default type callers hardkey8 Default type conf hardkey9 Default type xfer hardkey5 Options Key ...

Page 419: ...uration files hardkey1 Default type line hardkey2 Default type line hardkey3 Default type redial hardkey4 Default type callers hardkey5 Options Key hardkey6 Hold Key hardkey7 Goodbye Key hardkey8 Default type conf hardkey9 Default type xfer hardkey10 Default type directory hardkey11 Presence Key Default line 1 Default line 2 Default value N A hardkey1 Default type line hardkey2 Default type line h...

Page 420: ... 5 6 7 indicated above in red is not supported 2 Hard keys are only configurable using the configuration files hardkey1 Default type line hardkey2 Default type line hardkey3 Default type redial hardkey4 Default type callers hardkey5 Options Key hardkey6 Hold Key hardkey7 Goodbye Key Default line 1 Default line 2 Default value N A ...

Page 421: ... on the model include none line speeddial dnd blf 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only list 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only acd 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only directory filter 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only callers redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging ho...

Page 422: ...an be set for the following key types only speeddial blf 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only list 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only acd 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only park pickup lcr blfxfer 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only redial filter 6865i 6867i 6869i 6873i only CONFIGURATION PARAMETER DESCRIPTION hardkeyN locked Locks the specified hard key ...

Page 423: ...havior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play a ring splash is defined as 2 then the behavior is the same as Normal but the ring splash plays when idle and also during the active call state 8 In call delayed same as Normal delaye...

Page 424: ...ey Mapping 6869i Hard Key Mapping and 6873i Hard Key Mapping figures 2 Hard keys 1 and 2 on all 6800 Series SIP phones cannot be programmed as Line keys other than their default Line 1 and Line 2 3 When hard keys 1 and 2 on the 6863i and 6865i are remapped if applicable LED indication will follow the color cadence of the corresponding feature when the key is reprogrammed 4 When hard keys 1 to 4 on...

Page 425: ...ified by the Administrator For example a phone has a Park key and a Pickup key already configured on the phone and the Administrator downloads a configuration file to the phone that has specific key types of None Line Speeddial and XML After the configuration file is downloaded the Park key list will show None Line Speeddial XML and Park the Pickup key list will show None Line Speeddial XML and Pi...

Page 426: ...en pause to let you enter the remaining phone number You can use this feature for numbers that contain long prefixes For example if you had the following Speeddial configuration in the configuration files softkey2 type speeddial softkey2 label Europe Office softkey2 value 1234567 softkey2 line 2 after you press softkey2 on the phone it dials the prefix number automatically and pauses for you to en...

Page 427: ...or s phone shows that the worker s phone is in use and busy BLF SETTING On the 6865i IP phone the LED lights next to each BLF programmable key illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off hook or unregistered The LED goes off when the line is idle When the monitored extension is ringing the LED flashes On the 6867i 6869i and 6873i the busy and idle states are indicated by the color of t...

Page 428: ...t URI using the list uri parameter in the configuration files or the BLF List URI field in the Mitel Web UI at the path Operation Softkeys Programmable Keys Expansion Module Keys Services BLF List URI For more information about the list uri parameter see Appendix A the section BLF List URI Settings on page 256 Example A receptionist has an IP phone that subscribes to a list of extensions from the ...

Page 429: ...same page Changes to the Monitored Users List are dynamic and the Mitel IP phones are automatically updated without requiring a restart Reference For sample BLF configurations see Appendix D Sample BLF Softkey Settings CONFIGURING BLFS Use the following procedures to configure BLF and BLF List on the IP phone To set BLF or BLF List in the configuration files see Appendix A the sections Softkey Pro...

Page 430: ...person who s extension you are monitoring if Type is BLF 5 In the Value field enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key For example for BLF the value is the extension you want to monitor For BLF List the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring 6 Click Save Settings to save your changes 7 In the Line field select a line number that is actively registe...

Page 431: ...5 seconds before switching again When a user manually scrolls the pages by pressing the More key or the Function key for the page you want to display on the M685i no activity triggered page flipping should occur for 5 seconds after the manual switch If the phone softkeys are hidden by an overlay screen such as an XML UI object a menu e g the Services Directory or Received Callers List menu or if t...

Page 432: ...s the maximum characters the respective phone s screen can display the phone adds an ellipsis i e at the end of the label indicating the label has been automatically truncated In the secondary display mode i e blf display label to max 1 the phone does not automatically truncate the label and simply displays as many characters as the area reserved for the label allows CONFIGURING BLF AND BLF LIST S...

Page 433: ...s set to 1 enabled then the series of question marks or configured symbol will be hidden and nothing will be shown on the screen beside the affected softkeys If this parameter is set to 0 disabled then the series of question marks or configured symbol will be displayed on the screen indicating blank BLF List softkeys CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY FOR BLANK BLF LIST SOFTKEYS Use the following procedure t...

Page 434: ...te the ring splash value is checked to take the appropriate action The following alerting patterns are available for all applicable phones 0 Silence ring splash off 1 Normal same as current BLF ring splash 2 Normal delayed After a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 3 Periodic similar t...

Page 435: ...call low volume same as Low volume but ring splash plays when idle and also during the active call state 12 In call low volume delayed same as Low volume delayed but ring splash plays when idle and also during the active call state use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay The following parameters are available allowing administrators to set and pass the control of the ring splash to...

Page 436: ...e a call hold or call waiting reminder is playing the secondary in call ring splash will be played 500ms after the current event has ended The inverse is also true whereby call hold or call waiting reminders will be played 500ms after the BLF ring splash if they occur while a BLF ring splash is playing In scenarios where multiple keys are configured for periodic ring splashes and multiple BLF targ...

Page 437: ...inimum value for this parameter is 120 seconds 2 minutes and the maximum is 2147483647 seconds The default is 3600 1 hour The phone resubscribes to the BLF subscription service before the defined subscription period ends You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING BLF SUBSCRIPTION PERIOD Use the following procedures to configure the BLF subscription...

Page 438: ... 6867i 6869i and 6873i only and Speeddial Xfer The BLF key allows one or more extensions to be monitored and once there is any state change with those extensions the key shows the status of the monitored lines The Xfer key allows a call to be transferred to other recipients blindly or consultatively The Speeddial key allows a number to be dialed quickly by pressing one key configured for speeddial...

Page 439: ...ine key again BLF Xfer and Call forward When the focused line is in the Ringing state pressing the BLF Xfer key forwards the call to the extension unconditionally disregarding the status of the monitored extension BLF Xfer and Speeddial When the focused line and the monitored extension are idle pressing the BLF Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the number of the extension SPEEDDIAL ...

Page 440: ...e 1 Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a BLF Xfer and Speeddial Xfer key on the IP phone using the configuration files To set a BLF Xfer and Speeddial Xfer key using the configuration files see Appendix A Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters on page A 217 SOFTKEY PARAMETERS PROGRAMMABLE KEY PARAMETERS EXPANSION MODULE PARAMETERS TOP SOFTKEY PA...

Page 441: ...lick on Operation Expansion Keys 2 Choose a key that you want to assign the BLF Xfer key or a Speeddial Xfer key to and select BLF Xfer or Speeddial Xfer from the Type field 3 In the Label field enter a key label to assign to the BLF Xfer key for example BX35 4 In the Value field enter the monitored extension for example 35 5 In the Line field select the line for which you want to use the key func...

Page 442: ... number when the far end is ringing The message Conf Unavailable briefly displays when a conference is already in progress The active call is not put on hold when the speeddial number is dialed This feature is not compatible with centralized conferencing The softkey programmable key is called Speeddial Conf in the Web UI drop down list In the configuration file use speeddialconf as the softkey typ...

Page 443: ...tion Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module Keys 2 In the Type field select Speeddial Conf from the list of options 3 In the Label field enter a key label to assign to the Speeddial Conf key for example Sales 4 In the Value field enter the number that the phone dials when the Speeddial Conf key is pressed for example 4556 5 In the Line field select the line for which you want to ...

Page 444: ...essages By configuring a programmable key top softkey or expansion module softkey as Speeddial MWI and defining call and voicemail URIs users can monitor and listen to pending messages on multiple voicemail accounts When new messages are pending on a monitored voicemail account the corresponding Speeddial MWI key s LED will blink 6865i 6867i and 6869i and the UI for top softkeys on the 6867i 6869i...

Page 445: ...rs can configure the key through the Mitel Web UI as well as the configuration files Configuring a Speeddial MWI Key Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to configure a Speeddial MWI key using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Softkeys and XML Top Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module N 2 Choose an available key and in the Type field ...

Page 446: ...or which you want to use the key functionality e g 3 The following parametersareexamplesyoucanusetoconfigureaSpeeddial MWIkeyusingtheconfiguration files For Top Softkeys topsoftkey1 type speeddialmwi topsoftkey1 label Peter topsoftkey1 value 33123456 3456 0000 domain sip voicemail_peter domain topsoftkey1 line 3 For Programmable Keys prgkey1 type speeddialmwi prgkey1 value 33123456 3456 0000 domai...

Page 447: ...esponding Line key Message Waiting Indicator MWI etc will behave normally Administrators can configure this feature by defining the discreet ringing parameter in the configuration files i e 0 the default disables this feature while 1 enables discreet ringing or by programming a key on the phone with the Discreet Ringing type feature using the Mitel Web UI After the key has been programmed users ca...

Page 448: ... configure an ACD softkey or programmable key When an IP phone user wants to subscribe to a queue in order to receive incoming calls the user presses the ACD key The IP phone UI prompts the user to log in When the IP phone user is ready to receive calls from the server the user logs into a queue Depending on the server configuration the IP phone is either in an unavailable or available state If th...

Page 449: ...he following parameters to configure anACDAuto Available Timer in the configuration files acd auto available acd auto available timer CONFIGURING AN AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD KEY You can configure an ACD key on softkeys programmable keys and extension module keys The following table illustrates examples of configuring an ACD key on the phone Use the following procedures to configure an ACD k...

Page 450: ... Click on Operation Expansion Module N Depending on your phone model the key configuration screen displays 2 In the Type field select Auto Call Distribution 3 In the Label field specify a name for this ACD softkey The Label helps identify which queue you are subscribing to when you login This field does not apply to programmable keys For example Sales 4 In the Line field select the line which the ...

Page 451: ...allow an IP phone user to log into the Customer Support phone queue The administrator assigns the label Support to the softkey so it is easily recognizable to the IP phone user When the IP phone user wants to subscribe to the Customer Support queue the user presses the Support key and can log in Once logged in to the queue you can make yourself available or unavailable to take calls by pressing th...

Page 452: ...The default is 3600 1 hour Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configuredACD feature to become active more quickly after a software firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter the default value 3600 will be used by the IP phone You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI CONF...

Page 453: ... Settings to save your changes DO NOT DISTURB DND The IP phones have a feature you can enable called Do Not Disturb DND An Administrator or User can set Do Not Disturb based on the accounts on the phone all accounts or a specific account You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND The three modes you can set on the phone for DND are Account Phone Custom MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 454: ... configure the DND softkey and the DND mode Account Phone Custom using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Once you configure DND you can access the DND screen on the IP Phone UI Notes 1 If there is only one account configured on the phone then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to Phone 2 You must configure a DND key on the phone to be able to use thi...

Page 455: ...softkey1 type dnd softkey1 states idle connected incoming outgoing busy In the above example softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only with a custom configuration Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you can customize on the phone To set DND in the configuration files see Appendix A the sections DND Key Mode Settings on page A 181 Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Mo...

Page 456: ... for all accounts on the phone DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF Custom Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key that list the account s on the phone The user can select a specific account for DND turn DND ON for all accounts or turn DND OFF for all accounts 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes The change takes effect immediately without a rebo...

Page 457: ... mode the first account allows you to change the DND status for all accounts 2 Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependent on the number and name of accounts configured on the phone In the screen in step 4 Screenname1 is configured on Line 1 Screenname2 is configured on Line 2 and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3 The name for the account is dependent on the name specif...

Page 458: ...nts are configured on the phone Only account 1 has DND enabled while account 2 has DND disabled DND in Phone Mode Default 1 Press the DND key to turn on off DND for all accounts on the phone 2 Use the 3 and 4 navigation keys to scroll through each account Note If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed DND is disabled on the IP Phone Notes 1 If there is no DND key configured or if it is...

Page 459: ...making the change press 3 Done and then Confirm to save the change Pressing 0 Cancel cancels the attempted change CONFIGURING DND USING THE IP PHONE UI 6867I 6869I 6873I After you add a DND key to your phone you can toggle the DND state using this key on the phone Use the following procedure to enable disable DND on the IP phone The following procedures assume you have already configured a DND key...

Page 460: ...6869i 6873i From the Home screen press the DND softkey to toggle DND on or off for all accounts on the phone DND in Custom Mode 6867i 6869i 1 From the Home screen press the DND softkey The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable disable a specific account or all accounts 2 Use the 2 and 5 navigation keys to scroll through the accounts and press the button to en...

Page 461: ...reen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable disable a specific account or all accounts 2 Press the checkbox to enable DND for the respective account 3 Press the Save softkey to save your changes IP PHONE UI Note Press the All On or All Off softkeys to quickly enable or disable DND for all accounts 6873i DND Custom Mode ...

Page 462: ...the group can pick up the held call As a multiple BLA group On one single phone multiple BLA DA can be associated with different line appearances Every BLA DA is independent from each other and follows the same rules as a single BLA group As multiple instances of a BLA DA A x line id parameter was defined in draft anil sip ping bla 02 txt to present the incoming call to or place an outgoing call o...

Page 463: ...mber BLA Number Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for per line configurations For Sylantro Server When configuring the BLA feature on a per line basis for a Sylantro server the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter for all the phones in the group For example if sip lineN user name is...

Page 464: ...sing the Configuration Files Use the following procedures to configure global BLA on the IP phone For specific global parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section SIP Basic Global Settings on page A 70 Configuring Per Line BLA Using the Configuration Files Use the following procedures to configure per line BLA on the IP phone For specific per line parameters you can...

Page 465: ... 2 In the Line Mode field select the BLA option 3 In the Phone Number field enter the phone number of the IP phone 4 For global configuration of BLA In the BLA Number field enter the Bridge Line Appearance BLA number to be shared across all IP phones 5 For per line configuration of BLA In the BLA Number field enter the Bridge Line Appearance BLA number to be shared on a specific line 6 Click Save ...

Page 466: ...tion in the subscribe message received from the server If no value is specified in the Subscribe message received from the server the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds You can configure this parameter using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Configuring the BLA Subscription Period Use the following procedures to configure the BLA Subscription Period To configure the BLA subscrip...

Page 467: ...erver If no value is specified the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds Valid values are 0 to 3700 Default is 300 seconds 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes USING A BLA LINE ON THE IP PHONE If you have either a global or per line BLA configuration and you want to share a call on the line with a BLA group you need to press the Hold button before sharing the call with the group For ex...

Page 468: ...e as a BLA then there is no need for third party registration WhenconfiguringtheBLAfeatureonaper linebasisforthirdpartyregistrationandsubscription the third party name must be configured using the sip lineN bla number parameter For third party registration to work effectively one of the lines should register as generic with its own username For example Bob has Alice s appearance on his phone Bob s...

Page 469: ...e following are limitations of the BLA Support for MWI feature The phone shows MWI for the first matching identity if more than one line with different user names has the same BLA account If a normal line has the same user name as the BLA user of another line the phone shows MWI only for the normal line Note The P Preferred Identity for BLA accounts is also sent for hold unhold messages Notes 1 If...

Page 470: ...configure BLA support for MWI For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section BLA Support for MWI on page A 90 CONFIGURING BLA SUPPORT FOR MWI USING THE MITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings CONFIGURATION FILES MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 471: ...rty Refer to the following example Notes 1 If you change the setting on this parameter you must reboot the phone for it to take affect 2 Both the sip explicit mwi subscription and sip mwi for bla account parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur 3 The MWI re subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the sip explicit mwi subscription period paramete...

Page 472: ...CA bridging Bridge active A bridged call is in progress Bridge held The 3rd party i e non SCA party in the bridge is on hold The following tables provide the key states and LED behavior in an SCA bridge call for users involved in an SCA call and users not involved in the SCA call Line Keys and Idle Screens Note Enabling disabling the beep is configurable on the server side Note A Call Info header ...

Page 473: ...d Red Held Slow Flashing Red Slow Flashing Red Hold private Slow Flashing Red Solid Red Bridge active Solid Red Solid Red Bridge held Slow Flashing Red Solid Red STATE LINE KEY PRESSED FOR LOCAL LINE KEY PRESSED FOR REMOTE Idle N A Attempt to seize the line Seized Hang up Ignore Progressing Hang up Ignore Alerting answer N A Active Hold Bridge Held Retrieve Bridge Hold private Retrieve Ignore Brid...

Page 474: ... 2 0 when the phone looses connection and is in local mode with the network device the phone switches to the generic line mode instead of the BroadSoft SCA line mode This ensures users are able to make and receive calls as the phone does not need to send the SUBSCRIBE message to get a dial tone to make a call Once the phone is connected to the network device again the phone leave local mode and sw...

Page 475: ...loud Telepo servers The following paragraphs describe the static and programmable configuration of the call park and pickup feature PARK PICKUP STATIC CONFIGURATION The static method configures park and pickup on a global basis for all supported IP phones You can use the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI to configure a park pickup static configuration In the configuration files you use the f...

Page 476: ...following table provides the values you enter for the sprecode and pickupsprecode parameters configuration files or Park Call and Pickup Parked Call fields Mitel Web UI Park Pickup Call Server Configuration Values Leave value fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature Configuring Park Pickup Static Configuration Using the Configuration Files Use the following parameters to configure park ...

Page 477: ...iguration creates park and pickup keys softkeys programmable keys expansion module keys that you can configure on the IP phones For the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones you can configure keys with park and pickup functionality and then specify a customized label to display on the Phone UI specify the state of the park and or pickup keys not applicable for MiCloud Telepo interoperability For the 686...

Page 478: ...roviders call manager For the MiCloud Telepo call manager two keys configured with BLF Xfer functionality one defined as myCalls and the other as callPark facilitates the call park retrieve method When the first BLF Xfer key defined as myCalls is pressed the phone will subscribe to the myCalls domain com URI and users will be able to pick up any authorized calls Pressing the second BLF Xfer key de...

Page 479: ...iders topsoftkeyN type blfxfer topsoftkeyN label Park topsoftkeyN value callPark topsoftkeyN type blfxfer topsoftkeyN label Pickup topsoftkeyN value myCalls SERVER PARK CONFIGURATION PICKUP CONFIGURATION Asterisk prgkeyN type park sip lineN park pickup config 70 70 asterisk prgkeyN type pickup sip lineN park pickup config 70 70 asterisk Sylantro prgkeyN type park sip lineN park pickup config 98 99...

Page 480: ...le the following has been configured on the phone softkey1 type park softkey1 label parkCall softkey1 states connected softkey1 value broadworks 68 softkey2 type pickup softkey2 label pickupCall softkey2 states idle outgoing softkey2 value broadworks 88 sip park pickup config 70 70 asterisk sip line1 park pickup config 78 98 broadworks If the active call is using Line1 the phone will use the Broad...

Page 481: ...s and XML Park Pickup Call Server Configuration Values Use the following procedure to configure the park pickup call feature using the Mitel Web UI For the 6867i 6869i 6873i 1 Click on Advanced Settings Line 1 you can select any line 2 Under Advanced SIP Settings in the Park Pickup Config field enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network Note Applicable values depend on the ser...

Page 482: ...can select any line 2 Under Advanced SIP Settings in the Park Pickup Config field enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network Notes 1 The Value and Line fields are already configured from the Park Pickup Config field 2 The park softkey has a default state of Connected 3 Leave this state enabled or to disable uncheck the check box Notes 1 The Value and Line fields are already co...

Page 483: ...nd apply the changes Configuring a Park Pickup Key Using Mitel Web UI for the MiCloud Telepo for Service Providers Call Manager Use the following procedure to configure a BLF Xfer key will call park pickup functionality using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Softkeys and XML Top Keys or Click on Operation Expansion Module N Note The Value and Line field...

Page 484: ...g a Call 1 While on a live call press the Park softkey 2 Perform the following for your specific server If the call is parked successfully the response is either a greeting voice confirming that the call was parked or a hang up occurs 3 If the call fails you can pick up the call using the next procedure and press the Park softkey again to retry step 2 IP PHONE UI ASTERISK Server announces the exte...

Page 485: ...oftkey or programmable key and a call comes into your phone after you are finished with the call and hangup you can press the key configured for lcr and the phone dials the last call you received When you configure an lcr softkey the label LCR displays next to that softkey on the IP phone When the Sylantro server detects an lcr request it translates this request and routes the call to the last cal...

Page 486: ...only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration Using the Mitel Web UI if you make changes to that initial account the changes apply to all accounts on the phone Custom mode The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts You can configure a specific mode All Busy and or No Answer for each account in...

Page 487: ...on Programmable Keys Notes 1 In the configuration files the call forward key mode parameter in the section Configuring Call Forwarding on page 5 226 is in addition to the previous call forward parameter call forward disabled You can still use the previous call forwarding parameter if desired in the configuration files 2 In the IP Phone UI you can access the Call Forwarding features at the path Opt...

Page 488: ...ey applies to the account in focus Phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts All Busy and or No Answer When you configure the initial account the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts In the Mitel Web UI only the account you configured is enabled All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configu ration Using the Mitel Web UI if ...

Page 489: ...f there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options Call Forward 2 If there is only one account configured on the phone then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to Phone 3 When configuring a CFWD state All Busy No Answer for an account you must configure a CFWD number for that ...

Page 490: ...nt mode in step 4 you can enable disable each account or all accounts as applicable You can enter different phone number for each enabled state 2 If you selected Custom mode you can enable disable each account or all accountsasapplicable Youcanenterdifferentphonenumbersforeachenabled state 3 If you selected Phone mode all accounts are set to the same CFWD configuration All Busy and or No Answer as...

Page 491: ...you use the Mitel Web UI to change the Call Forward Key Mode to Phone all accounts synchronize to Account 1 Notes 1 If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed you can still enable CFWD via the at the path Options Call Forward 2 If there is only one account configured on the phone then the mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set to Phone 3 Using th...

Page 492: ...orwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call No Answer Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings You can also use the following keys if required All Off Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus All On Enables all CF...

Page 493: ...OFF 6 Press 4Set to save the change 7 In the CFWD State screen press the 2 navigation keys to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press 4Change Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus When the phone is in the state you specified and a call comes into the phone it forwards the call to the number you specify 8 Press 4Set to save the change CFWD State Screen Cfwd All Use to view ...

Page 494: ... call forward is configured on the phone the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No Rings screen and then forwards the call if there is no answer 11 Press 4Set to save the change 12 Press 3Done to save all your changes Each time you press 3 Done the following screen displays 13 Press Confirm to confirm the change s each time the Apply Changes screen displays All changes are saved to...

Page 495: ...ou can enable disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states However the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call IP...

Page 496: ...screen Press 2Next to toggle the state of the CFWD state ON or OFF In the example in Step 4 you press 2Next to change the option to Off 6 Press the 4Set key to save the change 7 In the CFWD State screen press the 2 navigation key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press 4Change Note If CFWD All CFWD Busy and CFWD No Answer are all enabled and or if the account has DND enabled the CFWDAll sett...

Page 497: ...ing calls Valid values are 1 to 20 Default is 3 When the phone receives an incoming call and call forward is configured on the phone the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No Rings screen and then forwards the call 12 Press 4Set to save the change 13 Press 3Done to save all your changes Each time you press 3Done the following screen displays 14 Press Confirm to confirm the change s...

Page 498: ...ons All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call No Answer Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings You can also use the following keys if req...

Page 499: ...hange the option to Off 6 Press the 4Set key to save the change 7 In the CFWD State screen press the 2 navigation key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press 4Change 8 Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus When the phone is in the state you specified and a call comes into the phone it forwards the call to the number you specify 9 Press 4Set to save the change CFWD State...

Page 500: ...call and call forward is configured on the phone the phone rings the number of times you specify in the No Rings screen and then forwards the call 12 Press 4Set to save the change 13 Press 3Done to save all your changes Each time you press3 Done the following screen displays 14 Press Confirm to confirm the change s each time the Apply Changes screen displays All changes are saved to the phone for ...

Page 501: ...een displays for the account you selected 5 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call Note If the BroadSoft BroadWorks Executive and...

Page 502: ...o back to the Home screen 4 With the account in focus on Home screen press the configured Call Fwd softkey or press and press the Call Forward icon The Call Forward screen displays for the account you selected 5 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states Notes 1 Pressing the 2 navigation key moves the selection to the next field checkbox 2 If All and Busy and N...

Page 503: ...ption and press the button or Select softkey The Call Forward screen displays and is applicable to all accounts configured on the phone 2 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Busy Forwards incoming calls to a specified number if DND has been enabled for that account OR if t...

Page 504: ...applicable to all accounts configured on the phone 2 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states All Forwards all incoming calls for the respective account to the specified number Notes 1 Pressing the 2 navigation key moves the selection to the next field checkbox 2 If All and Busy and No Answer are all enabled and or if the account has DND enabled the All setti...

Page 505: ...on or Select softkey The Call Forward screen displays 2 Press the 3 or 4 navigation keys to change to the desired account 3 Enter forwarding numbers using the dialpad keys for any of the following states Notes 1 If All and Busy and No Answer are all enabled and or if the account has DND enabled the All settings take precedence over Busy and No Answer 2 Pressing the CopyToAll key copies the call fo...

Page 506: ...e Call Forward mode and press the button to enable the Call Forward mode 6 Press the Save softkey to save your changes CFWD in Custom Mode 6873i 1 Press the configured Call Fwd softkey or press and press the Call Forward icon The Call Forward screen displays Notes 1 Pressing the 2 navigation key moves the selection to the next field checkbox 2 If All and Busy and No Answer are all enabled and or i...

Page 507: ...ther destination i e via call forward the phone displays the Caller ID phone number and or caller name of the new destination and the reason for the call diversion Similarly at the new destination the Caller ID of the original call destination displays CALL DIVERSION EXAMPLE 1 Tim calls Mark at x400 2 Mark s phone is busy 3 Mark s phone diverts the incoming call to another destination Roger x 464 ...

Page 508: ...honewilldisplaytheinformationstoredinthelocaldirectory instead of the display name of the INVITE The directory lookup suppression pattern allows for the customization of the name displayed on the IP phone s screen and suppression of the local directory lookup This parameter is useful in such cases where a call manager will intentionally modify the display name according to a specific scenario For ...

Page 509: ... header of the INVITE message for incoming calls When this feature is enabled the call destination name displays on the LCD of the phone This allows the user to easily determine the intended destination of an incoming call BEHAVIOR OF THE PHONE When this feature is enabled the phone behaves as follows Notes 1 Pattern matching is only applied for incoming calls and against the From header display n...

Page 510: ...es When disabled the Received Callers List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Received Callers List key is ignored when pressed When enabled you can view scroll and delete line items in the Received Callers List from the IP phone UI You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the Received Callers List You can download the Received Callers List to your PC for viewing using the...

Page 511: ...s ignored if pressed by the user Use the following procedures to enable disable the Missed Received Callers List on the IP phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling the Missed Received Callers List see Appendix A the section Missed received Callers List Settings on page A 155 DOWNLOADING THE RECEIVED CALLERS LIST Use the following procedure to dow...

Page 512: ...ecifying URIs for these parameters cause the creation of an XML custom application instead of the standard function of the Received Callers List and Services keys An Administrator can configure these parameters using the configuration files only CREATING CUSTOMIZABLE RECEIVED CALLERS LIST AND SERVICES KEYS Use the following procedure to create customized Received Callers List and Services keys on ...

Page 513: ...ne s idle screen as number New Calls As the number of unanswered calls increment the phone numbers associated with the calls are stored in the Missed Callers List The user can access the Missed Callers List and clear the call from the list Once the user accesses the Missed Callers List the number New Calls on the idle screen is cleared Note The phones also include a Missed Calls Message field in a...

Page 514: ...g disabling the Missed Calls Indicator see Appendix A the section Missed Calls Indicator Settings on page A 161 MISSED CALLS INDICATOR LINE APPLICABILITY Administrators can also select the specific lines on the phone to which the missed calls indicator is applicable This can be performed by defining the sip lineN missed calls enabled parameter in the configuration files 0 for disabled 1 for enable...

Page 515: ...4 2 UnderAdditional Settings for the Missed Calls option enable by checking the checkbox or disable by unchecking the box default is enabled 3 Click Save Settings 4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for any other lines you want to configure ...

Page 516: ...dit existing contacts Users can also view contact details e g title company name numbers work and home addresses e mail addresses etc Downloading the Local Directory List Using the Mitel Web UI You can use the Mitel Web UI to download the Local Directory List from the IP phone to the configuration server Note For more detailed information about user related Directory functions see your Mitel Model...

Page 517: ...st CSV BASED DIRECTORIES Two Comma Separated Value CSV based directory files can be created and utilized on the phone as per previous releases but the number of fields the phone can parse has been greatly expanded The phone can now handle CSV files with the following field values in the following order separated by commas First Name mandatory Last Name Company Job Title Work Address Street Work Ad...

Page 518: ...ctory list file that you can download from the configuration server directory 2 The name location of the second CSV based directory list file that you can download from the configuration server directory 1 name Specifies the folder name of the directory defined in the directory 1 parameter Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Enabling Disabling Directories and Renaming Labels Using the ...

Page 519: ...aming Labels Using the Phone UI on page 5 267 for details CONFIGURATION FILES PARAMETER DESCRIPTION exchange server Specifies the user s Microsoft Exchange server IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN exchange use ssl Specifies whether SSL Secure Sockets Layer should be enabled or disabled exchange path Configures a custom Exchange Web Services EWS path on the Exchange server hosting the ...

Page 520: ...ory resync operations exchange contacts resync max delay Specifies the maximum time in minutes the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a Microsoft Exchange directory checksync CONFIGURATION FILES Parameter Description xsi ip Specifies the Xsi Enterprise Directory credentials if applicable and IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of the Xsi server in the following syntax s...

Page 521: ... on page 5 267 for details xsi group common directory enabled Specifies whether or not the BroadSoft Xsi Group Common Directory should be enabled to be accessed on the phone Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Enabling Disabling Directories and Renaming Labels Using the Phone UI on page 5 267 for details xsi personal contacts name Specifies the folder name of the BroadSoft Xsi Personal...

Page 522: ...he BroadSoft Xsi Group Common Directory when enabled Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Enabling Disabling Directories and Renaming Labels Using the Phone UI on page 5 267 for details xsi resync time Sets the time of day in a 24 hour period for the IP phone to update the BroadSoft Xsi directories xsi resync days Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between BroadSoft Xsi d...

Page 523: ...ldap server Specifies the LDAP server hostname or IP address ldap user name Specifies the user s LDAP user name Can also be configured through the Phone UI see Entering Usernames Passwords and Connection Testing on page 5 268 for details ldap base dn Specifies the LDAP server base DN It is the description of the top level of the directory tree Usually if a company domain is company com the base DN...

Page 524: ...bute list Specifies the LDAP last name e g Doe for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record ldap company attribute list Specifies the LDAP company name e g Mitel for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record ldap job title attrib...

Page 525: ...p home phone 1 attribute list Specifies the LDAP home phone 1 e g 1 416 468 3266 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record ldap home phone 2 attribute list Specifies the LDAP home phone 2 e g 1 416 468 3267 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will...

Page 526: ...nable disable the Directory List on the IP phones For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling the Directory List see Appendix A the section Enhanced Directory Settings on page A 126 Display and Sorting Administrators and users can configure the directory entries to display using the contact s first name and then last name or vice versa Moreover the option ...

Page 527: ...d to the phone For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Directory Settings option and press the button or Select softkey 3 With Display Name Order highlighted press the 4 key to move to selection column 4 Use the 5 and 2 keys to and choose the desired display name order 5 Press the 3 key to move to back to the options column and press the 2 key to highli...

Page 528: ...ng the Phone UI Use the following procedure on the phone s UI to enable disable directories and rename directory folder labels For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press the key on the phone to enter the Option List 2 Select Directory 3 Select External Sources 4 Navigate to the Directory Source you wish to enable disable e g LDAP and press the 4 Enter key 5 Navigate to the State setting and press the 4 Enter key...

Page 529: ...b 6 Press the Directory source label you wish to edit and enter in a new label 7 Press the Save softkey to save your changes Entering Usernames Passwords and Connection Testing Before a specific Directory can be loaded user credentials i e username and password for each respective external Directory source will need to be entered using the phone s UI by navigating to the Options Credentials menu F...

Page 530: ...the button or Select softkey 3 Use the 3 and 4 keys to navigate to the desired Directory source tab e g LDAP Microsoft Exchange BroadSoft Xsi 4 Press the 2 key to highlight the Username field and using the dialpad keys enter in the username applicable to the Directory source 5 Press the 2 key to highlight the Password field and using the dialpad keys enter in the password applicable to the Directo...

Page 531: ...ease check your username password and or server configuration 10 Press the Save softkey to save your changes DIRECTORY SEARCH DYNAMIC THRESHOLD 6867I 6869I AND 6873I ONLY On the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones contacts are listed and updated dynamically on screen depending on the letters that are entered into the search field This dynamic update is dependent on the directory search dynamic thresho...

Page 532: ...one will take the last n digits of the incoming call to perform the lookup For example if a local directory contains the following contact 555123456 Spain Office and the directory digits match parameter is configured directory digits match 9 the phone will take the last 9 digits of the incoming number 34555123456 and match it to the contact in the directory and display the following on the phone S...

Page 533: ...ers so the phone can dial out to connect to a voicemail server You associate the Voicemail numbers with the phone numbers configured on each line For each assigned Voicemail number there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum of 1 Voicemail access phone number The Voicemail list displays a list of phone numbers assigned to the IP phone that has registered voicemail accounts associated with them The en...

Page 534: ... vmail 95 Use the following procedure to configure voicemail using the configuration files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Voicemail Settings on page A 125 Note In the above example the user would dial 97 to access the voicemail account for line 1 and 95 to access the voicemail account for line 2 CONFIGURATION FILES Note You can also access...

Page 535: ... s corresponding softkey will display as a gray circle only i e no indication of the number of pending messages Additionally the softkey s LED will be illuminated if available The parameter is set to 0 no visual indicators by default CONFIGURING SCA VOICEMAIL VISUAL INDICATORS Use the following procedure to configure the SCA voicemail visual indicators For specific parameters you can set in the co...

Page 536: ...lan parameter introduces new alphanumeric characters that control the masking of the PIN and The following is an example value of the new configuration parameter 11 1XXX 5555 72 1XXX 73 1XXX where 1XXX will mask any PINs that are 4 digits long and start with 1 This parameter value should lead to the following masking Entered digits 11 1234 5555 will lead to INVITE to this number but 11 5555 is sho...

Page 537: ...cal list of menu items on the IP phones AastraIPPhoneTextScreen for Text screens AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen for Text screens Creates a screen of text that wraps appropriately Creates a formatted screen of text specifies text alignment text size text static or scrolling AastraIPPhoneInputScreen for User Input screens AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Time and Date Attributes for User Input screens Cre...

Page 538: ...78 Mitel Web UI See page 5 278 yes no Default no Note This value is case sensitive xml status scroll delay config files Status Scroll Delay seconds Web UI Allows you to set the time delay in seconds between the scrolling of each status message on the phone Use with Configuration files See page 5 279 Mitel Web UI See page 5 279 1 to 25 Default 5 XML Scroll Up and Scroll Down Tags Supports the new t...

Page 539: ...t in the configuration files and Mitel Web UI override the attribute you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object For example if the AastraIPPhoneStatus object has the attribute of Beep yes and you uncheck disable the XML Beep Support in the Mitel Web UI the phone does not beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object Setting the BEEP option in the configuration files and the Mitel Web UI ...

Page 540: ...ut having to reboot the phone This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed configuration parameter s from the server to the IP phones You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to change configuration parameters or configure new parameters However since the IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local cfg file when the phon...

Page 541: ... initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey an HTTP server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post When the phone sees a PUSH request containing an XML object it tries to authenticate the request It does so by checking the IP address or host name of the requesting host against a list of trusted hosts or domain names configured via the Mitel Web UI parameter called XML Push...

Page 542: ...s on the IP phone for the softkey For example XML 5 In the Value field enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application 6 In the XML Application URI field enter the HTTP server path or qualified domain name of the XML application you want to load to the IP phone For example you could enter an XML application called http 172 16 96 63 mitel internet php in the applicable field 7 ...

Page 543: ...p 8 the illustration shows a host IP address of 10 50 10 53 10 50 10 54 in the applicable field 11 Click Save Settings to save your changes For the 6863i 6865i 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys 2 Select an available key 3 In the Type field select XML from the list box 4 In the Value field enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application 5 In the XML Application URI field e...

Page 544: ...ZED SERVICE After you create save and configure the IP phone with an XML application the customized service is ready for you to use REFERENCE For more information about customizing the phones using XML objects contact Mitel Customer Support regarding the XML Development Guide Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press the programmable key configu...

Page 545: ...Startup Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs Successful Registration Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs Registration Event Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when there are registration state changes Note If defined this action URI is also called upon at startup if t...

Page 546: ...or more information see Action URI Disconnected on page 5 294 XML SIP Notify Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone For more information see XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 297 Poll Specifies the URI to be called every action uri poll interval seconds For more information see Polling Action URIs on page 5 291 Poll Interval Specifies the interval in sec...

Page 547: ...tion uri registered Successful Registration SIPUSERNAME SIPAUTHNAME PROXYURL LINESTATE LOCALIP action uri registration event Registration Event REGISTRATIONSTATE REGISTRATIONCODE action uri incoming Incoming Call REMOTENUMBER DISPLAYNAME SIPUSERNAME INCOMINGNAME LINESTATE CALLDURATION CALLDIRECTION LOCALIP action uri outgoing Outgoing Call REMOTENUMBER SIPUSERNAME LINESTATE LOCALIP action uri offh...

Page 548: ...sconnected on page 5 294 action uri xml sip notify XML SIP Notify LOCALIP For more information see XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 297 action uri poll Poll For more information see Polling Action URIs on page 5 291 action uri poll interval Interval For more information see Polling Action URIs on page 5 291 VARIABLE DESCRIPTION SIPUSERNAME Username associated with registered phone incoming caller o...

Page 549: ...associated with registered phone incoming caller outgoing caller INCOMINGNAME Name associated with incoming caller CALLDURATION Note This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing applications Duration of last call This variable is associated with onhook CALLDIRECTION Note This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing applications Specifies wh...

Page 550: ...ne executes a GET on http 10 50 10 140 outgoing pl number 5551212 You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Configuring XML Action URIs Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Action URI Settings on page A...

Page 551: ...e Successful Registration parameter executes on the first successful registration of each unique line configured on the phone 4 Enter an XML URI in the Registration Event field for when the phone performs regis tration For example http 10 30 100 39 PHPtests actionuri php action RegEvt regstate REGISTRA TIONSTATE regcode REGISTRATIONCODE This parameter specifies the URI that the phone executes a GE...

Page 552: ...e section Action URI Disconnected on page 5 294 11 To configure an XML SIP Notify event see the section XML SIP Notify Events on page 5 297 12 Optional You can poll a URI at specific intervals on the phones For more information about polling Action URIs see Polling Action URIs on page 5 291 13 Click Save Settings to save your changes POLLING ACTION URIS Another way to reach a phone behind a firewa...

Page 553: ...0 Configuring Polling Action URI via the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to configure polling Action URI using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Action URI 2 In the Poll field enter a URI to be called every action uri pool interval seconds Enter the value in a URI format For example http myserver com myappli xml 3 In the Interval field enter the interval in seconds between cal...

Page 554: ...TATE REGISTRATIONCODE If theAdministrator enables this feature by specifying a connect URI when a call is connected the phone checks to see if the event has a Connect URI configured If the phones finds a configured URI it executes an XML script or the variable if defined Example In the configuration files you can enter the following action uri connected http www example com connect php An Administ...

Page 555: ...n when it goes into the connected state Leaving this field empty disables the Action URI Con nected feature For example http www example com connect php 3 Click Save Settings to save your settings ACTION URI DISCONNECTED The phones have a parameter action uri disconnected that allow a disconnect event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state outgoing incoming connected or calling ...

Page 556: ...argo ana mitel com disconnected xml state LINESTATE and then Phone A calls Phone B Phone B answers and then hangs up Phone A executes a GET on http fargo ana mitel com disconnected xml state CONNECTED which is what the remote server receives An Administrator can enable the disconnect feature using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI LINESTATE VALUE DESCRIPTION MEANING IN A DISCONNECTED URI...

Page 557: ...guration files see Appendix A the section Action URI Settings on page A 164 1 Click on Advanced Settings Action URI Event 2 In the Disconnected field enter a valid URI for which the phone executes a GET on when it transitions from the incoming outgoing calling or connected state into the idle state Leaving this field empty disables the Action URI Disconnected feature For example CONFIGURATION FILE...

Page 558: ... empty in the SIP NOTIFY the phone automatically triggers a new pre configured action uri action uri xml sip notify Example of a SIP NOTIFY with XML Content NOTIFY sip 200 10 30 100 103 5060 SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP 10 30 100 103 5060 branch z9hG4bK7bbc1fac rport From sip 201 10 30 100 103 5060 tag 81be2861f3 To Jacky200 sip 200 10 30 100 103 5060 Contact sip 201 10 30 100 103 Call ID 59638f5d95c9d...

Page 559: ...e action uri xml sip notify parameter if it has been previously configured using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI If the action uri xml sip notify parameter is not configured the phone does not do anything On the phone side a System Administrator can enable or disable this SIP NOTIFY feature using the configuration files or the phone Web UI Also to ensure that the SIP NOTIFY is coming f...

Page 560: ...wing procedure to enable disable the XML SIP NOTIFY feature in the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings 2 The XML SIP Notify field is disabled by default To enable this field check the box This field enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra xml SIP NOTIFY message CONFIGURATION FILES MITEL WEB UI Note To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a...

Page 561: ...RI Click on Advanced Settings Action URI 2 Specify a URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone For example http myserver com myappli xml 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes XML SOFTKEY URI In addition to specifying variables for the Action URIs you can also specify variables in the XML softkey URIs that are bound when the key is pressed These variables are the s...

Page 562: ...alue http 10 50 10 140 script pl name SIPUSERNAME This softkey executes a GET on http 10 50 10 140 script pl name 42512 assuming that the sip username of the specific line is 42512 You can configure the XML softkey URI variables via the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI Configuring XML Softkey URIs Use the following procedures to configure XML Softkey URIs using the configuration files or th...

Page 563: ... phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed For example http 10 50 10 140 script pl name SIPUSERNAME 5 Click Save Settings to save your changes For the 6867i 6869i 6873i 1 Click on Operation Softkeys and XML MITEL WEB UI Note You can use the following variables in the URI SIPUSERNAME SIPAUTHNAME PROXYURL LINESTATE LOCALIP REMOTENUMBER DISPLAYNAME SIPUSERNAME INCOMINGNAME CALLDURATION CALLDIRE...

Page 564: ...sfer Xfer Conference Conf and Intercom Icom key features and the Voicemail option feature rather then accessing them from the phone side This feature allows you to access the redirected keys and voicemail option from the server using the IP Phone s Services Menu By default the server side keys function the same as the phone side key features The following table identifies the phone states that app...

Page 565: ...ppendix A the section XML Key Redirection Settings for Redial Xfer Conf Icom Voicemail on page A 277 OPTIONS KEY REDIRECTION The IP phones allow the redirecting of the Options Key to an XML script This allows the server to provide the phone with available options rather then accessing them from the phone side You access the Options Key XML script by pressing the Options Key You can still access th...

Page 566: ...he off hook dialing state which then destroys the XML application that was being displayed With the off hook interaction feature you can set an auto offhook parameter that determines whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off hook dialing state if the handset is off hook and the call ends AnAdministrator can enable allow phone to enter the off hook dialing state or disable prevent...

Page 567: ...still use any softkeys programmable key Extension Module Keys applicable to the XML application even though the phone is locked However any keys NOT associated with the XML application cannot be used when the phone is locked Also XML Get Requests override the locked feature on the phone so that any softkey pressed by the user that initiates a Get Request continues to get sent To allow the overridi...

Page 568: ...ssage on the screen the line not in focus plays busy tone 2 or more lines active and far end disconnects the line in focus displays disconnected screen plays busy tone displays Call Terminated message on the screen for 5 seconds When 5 second times out the busy tone stops the disconnected screen disappears 2 or more lines active and a line NOT in focus is disconnected by the far end no busy tone p...

Page 569: ...ine key The busy tone stops and the call terminated screen no longer displays A dial screen displays CENTRALIZED CONFERENCING FOR SYLANTRO AND BROAD SOFT SERVERS The IP phones include support for centralized conferencing Ad Hoc conferencing for Sylantro andBroadSoftservers ThisfeatureprovidescentralizedconferencingontheSIPserver versus localized on the phone and allows IP phone users to do these t...

Page 570: ...can configure centralized conferencing on a global or per line basis using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI To use the centralized conferencing after it is enabled see your Model Specific SIP Phone User Guide CONFIGURING CENTRALIZED CONFERENCING USING THE CONFIGU RATION FILES You use the following parameters to configure centralized conferencing in the configuration files Global Paramet...

Page 571: ... If you have specified a proxy server registrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf or Conference you specify conf proxy_server _address proxy_port For example if the proxy server address is 206 229 26 60 and the port used is 10060 then by setting this par...

Page 572: ...e do one of the following actions If you have specified a proxy server registrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf or Conference you specify conf proxy_server _address proxy_port To reach the media server using a different address port than that specifie...

Page 573: ...dditional caller to join an active call between two parties if the caller knows the dialog information This feature begins a conference using a join header as described in RFC 3911 The SIP Join feature provides the following Security via the whitelist which is a feature that already exists on the phone Initiates an offhook action uri when it is answered Initiates an onhook action uri at call termi...

Page 574: ...ive dial mode by configuring the new confxfer live dial parameter In live dial mode when the user is completing a conference call or transfer they will hear a dial tone before dialing begins In addition the phone will either match the number to the dial plan or wait for the set digit timeout In the default pre dial mode users are able to edit the destination number prior to dialing whereas in live...

Page 575: ...me and password that is sent to the HTTP HTTPS server for digest authentication by the server By default username is aastra and password is aastra You can enter the username and password in two ways Using the configuration files you can change the default values for the following parameters http digest username specifies the username to use for HTTP HTTPS digest authentication http digest password...

Page 576: ...Log In key on the IP Phone UI s idle screen 4 Press the Log In key to displays the username password screen 5 Enter a username in the Username field up to 40 characters and a password in the Password field up to 20 characters 6 After entering the username and password press Submit The phone attempts to authenticate with the server If successful the phone reboots and loads the user configuration If...

Page 577: ...headings on each page Page 1 List 1 and List 2 Page 2 List 3 and List 4 Page 3 List 5 and List 6 To use the M685i press the function key for the page you want to display to the LCD page 1 page2 or page 3 and press the applicable softkey You can customize the headings on each M685i Expansion Module screen using the configuration files by defining the following parameters Expansion Module 1 3 pages ...

Page 578: ... expmod3page3left expmod3page3right The following is an example of configuring Expansion Module 1 column headings expmod1page1left Personnel Ext expmod1page1right Operations Ext expmod1page2left Marketing Ext expmod1page2right Logistics Ext expmod1page3left Engineering Ext expmod1page3right Shipping Ext CUSTOMIZING THE M685I EXPANSION MODULE COLUMN DISPLAY For specific parameters you can set in th...

Page 579: ...Chapter 6 CONFIGURING ADVANCED OPERATIONAL FEATURES ...

Page 580: ... 6 13 As Feature Event Subscription page 6 14 Blacklist Duration page 6 16 Whitelist Proxy page 6 18 Transport Layer Security TLS page 6 20 802 1x Support page 6 23 Symmetric UDP Signaling page 6 29 Symmetric TLS Signaling page 6 30 Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers page 6 30 GRUU and sip instance Support page 6 31 Multi Stage Digit Collection Billing Codes Support for Sylantro Servers pag...

Page 581: ...Services and RTCP Summary Reports page 6 48 Configurable Alphanumeric Input Order for Username Prompts page 6 49 Active Voice over IP VoIP Recording page 6 50 BroadSoft Xsi Features page 6 54 BroadSoft BroadWorks Executive and Assistant Services page 6 59 Visitor Desk Phone Support page 6 68 Option to Enable Disable RTCP page 6 73 Configurable SIP No RTP Packet Timeout Period page 6 73 Option to P...

Page 582: ...on a network using mDNS When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server it is automatically configured by that TFTP server Missed Call Summary Subscription Allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to As Feature Event Subscription Allows you to enable or disable a specific line on the phone with the ...

Page 583: ...Between Early Media and Local Ringing The phones support switching between early media and local ring tone Configurable Codec Negotiation Behavior Allows you to enable or disable the microphone during early media Configurable Codec Negotiation Behavior Allows Administrators to change the phone s codec negotiation behavior so that the phone will indicate only one preferred codec in the SDP when rep...

Page 584: ...tel call manager supporting voice recording and a recording system with the predefined subset of the SIP interface administrators can configure the phones to send duplicate copies of the transmit and receive RTP or SRTP voice packets to the voice recording system BroadSoft Xsi Features Interoperability support for the BroadSoft Xsi Speed Dial 8 Call Log and Hide Number services has been implemente...

Page 585: ...dministrators the ability to set whether or not event IDs i e Event refer id xxxxx in REFER NOTIFY event headers received by the phone should be ignored Remote Rebooting and Dynamic Reloading of the Configuration Files Allows Administrators the ability to immediately reboot the phone or reload all the parameter settings in the configuration files without rebooting based upon a check sync NOTIFY me...

Page 586: ...guring the phone with TR 069 you can also do the following Reboot the phone Reset to factory defaults Update the firmware of the device Backup restore configuration Upload the log file REFERENCE For more information about TR 069 see the TR 069 Configuration Guide MAC ADDRESS LINE NUMBER IN REGISTER MESSAGES The IP phones can send the MAC address and line number in the REGISTER packets making it ea...

Page 587: ...ced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Setting 2 Enable the Send MACAddress in REGISTER Message field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box 3 Enable the Send Line Number in REGISTER Message field by checking the check box Disable this field by unchecking the box 4 Click Save Settings to save your settings 5 Select Operation Reset and click Restart CONFIGURATION FILES MIT...

Page 588: ...ansferor to start the transfer while the target phone is still ringing The following parameter supports different behaviors of a semi attended transfer sip refer to with replaces This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only The combination of this new parameter sip refer to with replaces and the existing parameter sip cancel after blind transfer determines how the semi attended ...

Page 589: ...S For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for customizing the semi attended transfer method see Appendix A the section Semi Attended Transfer Settings on page A 274 UPDATE CALLER ID DURING A CALL It is possible for a proxy or call server to update the Caller ID information that displays on the phone during a call by modifying the SIP Contact header in the re INVITE messa...

Page 590: ...ation server on the network without any end user intervention When it receives DHCP option 66 TFTP server it automatically gets configured by the TFTP server An already configured phone either previously configured by auto discovery or manually configured added to a network uses its predefined configuration to boot up Note After the phone has been successfully recovered through the web recovery mo...

Page 591: ...alls phone B the server forwards the call to phone C With this feature phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B An Administrator can configure this feature on a global or per line basis using the configuration files CONFIGURING MISSED CALL SUMMARY SUBSCRIPTION USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES In addition to enab...

Page 592: ... key is custom configured a screen displays on the phone allowing the user to choose the account to apply DND or CFWD For information about CFWD and DND custom configuration see Chapter 3 the section Account Configuration on page 3 37 A solid Message Waiting Indicator MWI indicates if one line account has DND or CFWD enabled and the LED next to the DND CFWD key is ON A status displays on the LCD t...

Page 593: ... section As Feature Event Subscription Settings on page A 103 Configuring As Feature Event Subscription Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to enable disable the server side as feature event on the IP Phone using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings LineN Advanced SIP Settings 2 Enable the As Feature Event Subscription field by checking the check box Disable this field by u...

Page 594: ...server If you enable this feature then whenever the IP phone sends a SIP message to a server and does not get a response the phone automatically adds the server to the blacklist The IP phone avoids sending messages to any servers on the blacklist If all servers are on the blacklist then the IP phone attempts to send the message to the first server on the list You can specify how long failed server...

Page 595: ...ation using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings 2 In the Blacklist Duration field specify the length of time in seconds that a failed server remains on the server blacklist The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server if another server is available for this amount of time Valid values are 0 to 9999999 Default is 300 seconds 5 minutes For e...

Page 596: ...itors the following events and an update is triggered if required 200 OK responses to REGISTER requests if the peer s IP address is not currently in the whitelist 200 OK responses to INVITE requests if the peer s IP address is not currently in the whitelist INVITE requests from untrusted proxy servers CONFIGURING WHITELIST PROXY USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use the following parameter to conf...

Page 597: ...b UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings 2 The Whitelist Proxy field is disabled by default To enable this field check the box When this feature is enabled an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 598: ...ration of the phone If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS and a call is made from the phone this call and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated connection This significantly reduces the delay time when placing a call On the IP phones an Administrator can configure TLS and Persistent TLS on a global basis only using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI There is a keep alive f...

Page 599: ...eter i e defining the parameter as 1 ensures the phones use the SIPS URI scheme in such scenarios The SIPS URI scheme is used by default CONFIGURING TLS USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use the following parameters to configure TLS in the configuration files sip transport protocol sips persistent tls sip persistent tls keep alive sip send sips over tls sips root and intermediate certificates sips...

Page 600: ...use Use the following procedure to configure TLS using the Mitel Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Global SIP Advanced SIP Settings 2 In the Transport Protocol field select TLS or Persistent TLS 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes 4 Click on Advanced Settings TLS Support MITEL WEB UI Note If configuring Persistent TLS you must go to Advanced Settings Global SIP Basic Network Settings and ...

Page 601: ... and offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity control LAN access and apply traffic policy based on user or endpoint identity This feature supports both the EAP MD5 and EAP TLS protocols If802 1xonthephoneisenabled a 802 1xAuthenticating messagedisplaysduringstartup of the phone If the 802 1x failed to authenticate with the server the phone continues its normal startup process u...

Page 602: ... 802 1x feature on the IP phone using the configuration files the IP Phone UI or the Mitel Web UI CONFIGURING THE 802 1X PROTOCOL USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use the following parameters to configure the 802 1x Protocol on your phone using the configuration files For EAP MD5 use eap type identity md5 password pc port passthrough enabled For EAP TLS use eap type identity 802 1x root and inter...

Page 603: ... phone to use MD5 authentication or Select EAP TLS to configure the phone to use TLS authentication 7 Press Set 8 To configure MD5 select EAP MD5 Settings 9 Select Identity 10 Enter the identity or username used for authenticating the phone 11 Press Set 12 Enter the password used for authenticating the phone 13 Press Set CONFIGURATION FILES Note If configuring 802 1x using the IP Phone UI the cert...

Page 604: ...uthentication 6 In the EAP TLS Settings Identity field enter a username used for authenticating the phone 7 In the EAP TLS Settings MD5 Password field enter the password used for authenti cating the phone 8 Press the Save softkey 9 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect IP PHONE UI Note The 802 1x Protocol is disabled by default If you select EAP TLS authentication you must use the con...

Page 605: ...Identity field enter a username used for authenticating the phone 8 In the EAP TLS Settings MD5 Password field enter the password used for authenti cating the phone 9 Press the Save softkey 10 Restart the phone for the selection to take affect IP PHONE UI Note If required swipe left on the screen to navigate to the second page of options Note The 802 1x Protocol is disabled by default If you selec...

Page 606: ...To configure EAP MD5 2 In the EAP Type field select EAP MD5 Valid values are Disabled Default EAP MD5 and EAP TLS 3 In the Identify field enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802 1x 4 For example phone1 5 In the MD5 Password field enter a password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone 6 For example password1 7 Click Save Settings to save your changes To configure...

Page 607: ...ens for UDP messages using port 5060 You can manually disable symmetric UDP signaling using the IP phone s configuration file When you disable symmetric UDP signaling then the IP phone chooses a random source port for UDP messages The IP phone also chooses a random source port for UDP messages to the registrar if you configure a backup registrar server Likewise the IP phone chooses a random source...

Page 608: ...USING THE CONFIGURATI ON FILES You use the following parameter to enable or disable Symmetric TLS Signaling in the configuration files sips symmetric tls signaling For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Symmetric TLS Signaling Setting on page A 281 REMOVING USERAGENT AND SERVER SIP HEADERS Currently the phone always configures the SIP UserAgent...

Page 609: ...nes GRUU Draft 15 is not compatible with versions prior to GRUU Draft 10 Phones do not support temporary or phone created GRUUs Enabling Disabling GRUU and sip instance Support Use the following procedure to enable disable GRUU and sip instance support For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section GRUU and sip instance Support on page A 281 MULTI STAG...

Page 610: ...billing code The user dials the phone number When prompted for billing codes user dials the billing code For example suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 300 and dialing the external number 617 238 5500 The IP user then enters the number using the following format 6172385000 300 Using mandatory billing codes if the user is configuring a Speeddial number then they enter the number using ...

Page 611: ...ers in the Internet The IP Phones may be configured to issue requests for DNS records using one of three methods In the first method the IP phones issue requests for A records from the DNS server In the second method the IP phones issue requests for SRV records from the DNS server In the third method the IP phones issue requests for NAPTR records from the DNS server However the IP phones do not us...

Page 612: ...l use _sip _udp abc mitel com for the SRV lookup 3 If the NAPTR record is returned test mitel com SIP D2T _sip _tcp test mitel com where the service type TCP mismatches the phone configured transport protocol UDP the phone will ignore this value and use the default value _sip _udp test aastra com for the SRV lookup Note The phone does not use the service type sent by the NAPTR response to switch i...

Page 613: ... the following procedure to enable disable out of order SIP requests For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests on page A 283 EARLY ONLY PARAMETER IN REPLACES HEADER RFC3891 The phones support the early only parameter in the Replaces header as referenced in RFC3891 When the phone receives a Replaces header with the ...

Page 614: ...Appendix A the section Enable Microphone During Early Media on page A 207 CONFIGURABLE CODEC NEGOTIATION BEHAVIOR By default when the phone receives an SDP Offer with several codecs defined for the media stream the phone will reply with an SDP Answer containing all the codecs present in the Offer as per RFC 3264 A configuration parameter sip single codec reply in sdp is available that allows Admin...

Page 615: ... restriction was active and a user dialed a number that was not allowed the PBX sent a certain status code 4xx and the phone displayed Call Failed or Busy which was not very informative to the user Now when an outgoing call fails with a status code 4xx or 5xx the phone will look for the Reason Header RFC 3326 in the status message and display the Reason Header to the user The reason text is displa...

Page 616: ...y opt headers ENABLING DISABLING OPTIONAL ALLOW AND ALLOW EVENT HEADERS Use the following procedure to enable disable Allow and Allow Event headers For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Optional Allow and Allow Event Headers on page A 283 CONFIGURABLE SIP P ASSERTED IDENTITY PAI The IP Phones support a private extension to SIP for Asserted Ide...

Page 617: ...LING P ASSERTED IDENTITY PAI Use the following procedure to enable disable PAI For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section P Asserted Identity PAI on page A 283 CONFIGURABLE ROUTE HEADER IN SIP PACKET The IP Phones support the following parameter sip remove route This parameter enables or disables the addition of the Route header in a SIP packet Ena...

Page 618: ...060 received 10 50 91 2 f Unknown sip Unknown 10 50 91 2 tag as19d00fc8 t sip 1106 10 50 110 54 5060 transport udp tag 916699998 i 73cad5456806f3a7768d17e8617279d7 10 50 91 2 CSeq 102 OPTIONS By default the IP Phones use the long format However an Administrator can provision the short compact format using the configuration files The Mitel Web UI does not support this configuration feature ENABLING...

Page 619: ...t is discarded If you are in the process of changing the softkey or programmable key setting or the key is disabled while the event is being processed the request is discarded The phone maps key events to its physical keys and not to its mapped logical keys The following table identifies the XML URIs for pressing buttons on the phone CONFIGURATION FILES XML KEY URI DESCRIPTION LINE KEYS Key Line1 ...

Page 620: ...l softkeys on the expansion module VOLUME KEY Key VolDwn Volume Decrease Key Key VolUp Volume Increase Key FEATURE KEYS Key Xfer Transfer Key Key Conf Conference Key Key Services Services Key Key Intercom Intercom Key Key Headset Headset Key Note For Headset URI key the behavior will be as if the speaker headset key is pressed and does not switch to headset for headset key event or to speaker for ...

Page 621: ...AVIGATION KEYS Key NavUp Navigation Up Key Key NavDwn Navigation Down Key Key NavLeft Navigation Left Key Key NavRight Navigation Right Key FUNCTION KEYS ONLY IF PHYSICALLY CONFIGURED ON THE PHONE OR EXPANSION MODULE KeyPark Park Softkey KeyPickup Pickup Softkey Notes 1 If the URI key is a valid key the phone executes the key regardless of the current state on the phone 2 Park and Pickup XML URI s...

Page 622: ...or use when a third party hosting provider delivers SIP services but does not have local access or control of the LAN side DNS infrastructure CONFIGURING DNS HOST FILE PRE CACHING FROM THE CONFIGU RATION SERVER The DNS host file must reside on the same server as the configuration files startup cfg tuz etc and the filename to download is specified within the configuration Use the following paramete...

Page 623: ...erver3 or if the local LAN DNS server fails to respond CONFIGURING DNS SERVICE SRV RECORDS PRE CACHING In addition to using a host file to resolve host names to IP addresses an Administrator can also configure DNS SRV records Service Records for geographic redundancy and failover between application servers in the network The SIP registration and SIP proxy features on the phones previously allowed...

Page 624: ...rv3 target smallbox2 example com sip dns srv4 name _sip _udp example com sip dns srv4 priority 20 sip dns srv4 weight 10 sip dns srv4 port 5060 sip dns srv4 target backupbox example com The first three records SRV 1 2 and 3 share a priority of 10 so the weight field s value is used by the phones to load balance across the three target host names Bigbox will get 60 of the load and smallbox1 and sma...

Page 625: ...to 65535 Default is 0 For example sip dns srv1 priority 10 After this parameter is downloaded from the configuration server to the phone the phone uses the DNS server with the lowest numbered priority first to perform DNS lookups 4 Enter the parameter sip dnx srvX weight where X is a value from 1 to 4 Enter a value for the DNS server weight Valid values are 0 to 65535 Default is 0 For example sip ...

Page 626: ...ary reports The following parameters are available to be defined in the configuration files SIP SERVICES sip services transport protocol sip services port The above parameters are used to specify the transport protocol and port used for SIP services RTCP SUMMARY REPORTS sip rtcp summary reports transport protocol The above parameter is used to specify the transport protocol used for RTCP summary r...

Page 627: ...der during username prompts changes from uppercase letters to the respective digit and then to lowercase letters with each successive press of the key For example when pressing 2 on the keypad the following will be input with each successive press When the username alphanumeric input order parameter is defined as 1 the respective digit will be available as the first input option followed by upper ...

Page 628: ... voice recording system and when the session is established the IP phone will duplicate all of its incoming and outgoing RTP SRTP packets and send them to the voice recording system where they can be archived and analyzed as required Administrators must configure a whitelist for voice recording system authentication using the recorder addressN parameters where N is a number from 1 to 6 These param...

Page 629: ...using the recording destinationN parameters where N is a number from 1 to 6 These parameters are used to specify trusted IP addresses corresponding to the destination where the RTP SRTP packets should be sent The IP phone will check to see if the destination IP addresses are trusted before sending the duplicated RTP SRTP packets If all of these parameters are left undefined no authentication check...

Page 630: ...he beep tone is audible locally remotely or both WARNING THE RECORDING ICON IS DISPLAYED ON THE IP PHONES TO INDICATE THE RECORDING SESSION IS ACTIVE AND THAT A DUPLICATE COPY OF THE RTP SRTP STREAM IS TO BE SENT FROM THE PHONE TO THE RECORDING SERVER THE OVERALL RECORDING AND ITS QUALITY IS DEPENDENT ON THE RECORDING SERVER AND THE NETWORK Note In addition to the aforementioned parameters corresp...

Page 631: ...lowing procedure in the configuration files to configure the active VoIP recording feature For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Active VoIP Recording Settings on page A 290 CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 632: ...server Use the following procedure on the phone s UI to enter user credentials and test the connection to the Xsi server For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Navigate to the Credentials option and press the 4 Enter key 3 Use the 2 key to navigate to the BroadSoft Xsi option and press the 4 Enter key 4 Press the 2 key to highlight the Username field and press the 4 E...

Page 633: ...4 In the Username field enter in the username applicable to the Directory source 5 In the Password field enter in the password applicable to the Directory source 6 Press the BroadSoft Xsi tab and press the right arrow key until you get to the Test Connection tab 7 Press the BroadSoft Xsi checkbox 8 Press the Test softkey to begin testing A green will appear if there are no issues with the connecti...

Page 634: ...itel Web UI 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys or Click on Operation Softkeys and XML 2 Select the key you want to use as a Speed Dial 8 key 3 In the Type field select Speeddial to apply to the key 4 Optional for the 6867i 6869i 6873i In the Label field enter a label to apply to this key 5 In the Value field enter xsi speeddial8 6 Optional In the Line field select a line to apply to this key 7...

Page 635: ...utton or Details softkey All phone users can dial out by pressing the button Line button button or simply by picking up the handset the Outgoing Redial List for the 6867i 6869i and 6873i also offers a Dial softkey To specifically enable the Call Log service Administrators must define the xsi calllogs enabled parameter in the respective configuration file and users must enter in their username if r...

Page 636: ...ction column 4 Use the 5 and 2 keys to select either Disable or Enable 5 Press the Save softkey to save your changes For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the BroadSoft Call Settings icon 3 With the Hide Number option highlighted select either Disable or Enable 4 Press the Save softkey to save your changes ENABLING XSI FEATURES USING THE CONFIGURATION FILES You use t...

Page 637: ...mma For example if the Alerting Custom Calling Line ID Name setting in the BroadWorks Web portal is defined as F Filtrage Dupont Francois the From header of a filtered call sent by the BroadWorks SIP INVITE message will look similar to From F Filtrage Dupont Francois sip 5551234567 as aastra com user phone The sip execassist filter call prefix parameter in this scenario could be defined as sip exe...

Page 638: ...e The Executive s phone requires that only one Filter softkey be configured The Filter softkey s value can either be left undefined which will toggle the Executive Call Filtering settings on the call manager via the SIP SUBSCRIPTION NOTIFY mechanism or it can be defined using the following values which will toggle the settings via an FAC call Executive Call Filtering Activation FAC e g 61 Used whe...

Page 639: ... followed by a semi co lon e g 61 61 6 In the Line field select the line for which you want to use the key functionality 7 Click Save Settings to save your settings Configuring the Filter Softkey on the Executive s Phone Using the Configuration Files To configure the Filter softkey on the Executive s phone using the configuration files you must enter filter for the key type For the label 6867i 686...

Page 640: ...ftkeys are configured with key values pressing the respective Filter softkey will activate Executive Call Filtering for the applicable Executive and the softkey s corresponding LED will be lit When the same Filter softkey is pressed again Executive Call Filtering for the applicable Executive will deactivate and the softkey s corresponding LED will turn off Alternatively a single Filter softkey can...

Page 641: ...ly enter key labels to assign to the Filter key e g Filter Stefan for a specific Executive or simply Filter for a generic Filter key with no defined value Defining the value is optional If you choose to assign a Filter softkey and define values for each Executive enter in the respective Executive s phone or extension number e g 4100 For the line setting enter the line number for which you want to ...

Page 642: ...eys can be configured to efficiently utilize the Executive Assistant Initiate Call function With a Speeddial softkey configured for this feature Assistants can initiate a call on behalf of an Executive whereby the call will appear to the target as one originated by the Executive himself herself The Speeddial softkey s value can be defined using the following syntax Executive Assistant Initiate Cal...

Page 643: ...In the Line field select the line for which you want to use the key functionality 7 Click Save Settings to save your settings Configuring the Initiate Call Softkey on the Assistant s Phone Using the Configuration Files To configure the Initiate Call Speeddial softkeys on theAssistant s phone using the configuration files you must enter speeddial for the key types For the labels 6867i 6869i and 687...

Page 644: ...eddial softkey3 label Init3 softkey3 value 644052 4059 softkey3 line 1 For Top Softkeys topsoftkey1 type speeddial topsoftkey1 label Init topsoftkey1 value 64 topsoftkey1 line 1 topsoftkey2 type speeddial topsoftkey2 label Init2 topsoftkey2 value 644052 topsoftkey2 line 1 topsoftkey3 type speeddial topsoftkey3 label Init3 topsoftkey3 value 644052 4059 topsoftkey3 line 1 For Programmable Keys prgke...

Page 645: ...pe speeddial expmod1 key1 label Init expmod1 key1 value 64 expmod1 key1 line 1 expmod1 key2 type speeddial expmod1 key2 label Init2 expmod1 key2 value 644052 expmod1 key2 line 1 expmod1 key2 type speeddial expmod1 key2 label Init3 expmod1 key2 value 644052 4059 expmod1 key2 line 1 ...

Page 646: ... sip registrar ip 100 200 50 60 sip registrar port 5060 sip screen name Visitor sip user name 5000 sip dtmf method 1 sip xml notify event 1 user config URL http 100 200 50 79 vdp Note For VDP functionality the phone must be configured to accept XML SIP NOTIFY messages This can be enabled by defining the sip xml notify event parameter as 1 in the respective configuration file or by placing a checkm...

Page 647: ...reen Configuring the User Configuration Server URL Use the following parameter to configure the user configuration server URL For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files see Appendix A the section Visitor Desk Phone Settings on page A 296 CONFIGURATION FILES 6867i Visitor Account Example 6869i Visitor Account Example 6863i 6865i Visitor Account Example Visitor 12 Jul 12 49pm ...

Page 648: ... and user cfg file name must match and the password corresponds to the server password credential When the user s credentials are confirmed this triggers the call manager to send an unsolicited NOTIFY message containing an XML body that includes the subscriberLogin messageType with valid username and password values The phone then contacts the configuration server defined by the user config url pa...

Page 649: ...If using the Login key method Administrators can define in the configuration files a programmable key top or bottom softkey or expansion module key type as hotdesklogin or configure a Login key using the Web UI Creating a Login Key Using the Mitel Web UI Use the following procedure to create a Login key using the phone s Web UI 1 Click on Operation Programmable Keys 6863i 6865i or Softkeys and XML...

Page 650: ... account These security features ensure that accounts are only logged in to and logged out of when initiated by the respective user USER CONFIGURATION UPLOAD FUNCTIONALITY Any changes made to a user s profile while he she is logged in are saved to the user _local cfg file periodically The time period between the saves is configurable using the user config upload and user config upload delta parame...

Page 651: ...tings on page A 296 OPTION TO ENABLE DISABLE RTCP The rtcp enable parameter is available allowingAdministrators the ability to manually enable or disable RTCP Defining the parameter as 0 disables the feature while 1 enables the feature RTCP is enabled i e 1 by default Enabling Disabling RTCP Functionality Use the following procedure to manually enable disable RTCP functionality For the specific pa...

Page 652: ...ection Advanced SIP Settings on page 95 REMOTE REBOOTING AND DYNAMIC RELOADING OF THE CONFI GURATION FILES Upon a check sync NOTIFY message with a reboot parameter defined the phone will depending on the reboot parameter definition either immediately reboot the phone or reload all the settings in the configuration files without rebooting Feature behavior is as follows If a check sync NOTIFY contai...

Page 653: ...ter or per line sip lineN moh server parameters to enable the music on hold feature If a media server SIP address excluding the domain name is defined using the parameter the phone will use the specified server to provide an audio stream to any held parties The audio stream will be offered in all cases when a remote party is placed on hold i e when placed on hold directly when placed on hold while...

Page 654: ...Chapter 7 ENCRYPTED FILES ON THE IP PHONE ...

Page 655: ...ovides methods an administrator can use to store encrypted files to a server TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Encrypted Files on the IP Phone page 7 3 Configuration File Encryption Method page 7 3 Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files page 7 4 Vendor Configuration File Encryption page 7 6 ...

Page 656: ...e IP phones download it and use it locally to decrypt the configuration information from the startup tuz and mac tuz files Because only the encrypted versions of the configuration files need to be stored on the server no plain text configuration or passwords are sent across the network thereby ensuring security of the configuration data To make changes to the configuration files the SystemAdminist...

Page 657: ...ks Corporation Usage anacrypt infile cfg d dir p password m i v h ANACRYPT SWITCH DESCRIPTION infile cfg d dir Specifies that all cfg files in dir should be encrypted p password Specify password used to generate keys m Generate MAC tuz files that are phone specific This switch generates files that are only usable for phones with firmware version 2 2 0 and above v1 Specifies the version of encrypti...

Page 658: ...d v3 Example 3 Encrypting a mac cfg file with password 1234abcd for firmware version 3 3 1 and above C anacrypt 00085d000000 cfg p 1234abcd v3 Example 4 Encrypting a mac cfg file with password 1234abcd using MAC encryption for firmware version 3 3 1 and above C anacrypt 00085d000000 cfg m p 1234abcd v3 Notes 1 Configuration files that are encrypted using v3 encryption can only be decoded by phones...

Page 659: ...to the phone After the phone receives the file it updates the encryption key This method of encryption does not affect the implementation of the Mitel method of file encryption You can set the phone specific encryption key using the configuration files only For more information about configuration file encryption contact Mitel Technical Support CONFIGURING VENDOR CONFIGURATION FILE ENCRYPTION Use ...

Page 660: ...Chapter 8 UPGRADING THE FIRMWARE ...

Page 661: ...rmation about upgrading the IP phone firmware TOPICS This chapter covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Upgrading the Firmware page 8 3 Using the Firmware Update Page in the Mitel Web UI page 8 3 Using the Restart Feature page 8 5 Using the Auto Resync Feature page 8 6 ...

Page 662: ... restart the phone The phone automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the boot process Setting an Auto Resync feature to automatically update the firmware configuration files or both at a specific time in a 24 hour period Feature can be enabled using the configu ration files or the Mitel Web UI USING THE FIRMWARE UPDATE PAGE IN THE MITEL WEB UI You can use the Mitel ...

Page 663: ...ist to use for downloading the new firmware Valid values are TFTP FTP HTTP HTTPS 4 Inthe Server field entertheIPaddressindotteddecimalformat oftheTFTPconfiguration server or the domain name of the FTP HTTP or HTTPS configuration servers dependent on the protocol you selected in step 3 For example 432 221 45 6 5 In the Path field enter the path location on the protocol server for where the new firm...

Page 664: ...rmware Upgrade Successful USING THE RESTART FEATURE Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and configuration files stored on the configuration server RESTARTING THE PHONE USING THE IP PHONE UI For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Restart Phone 3 Press to confirm For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Sel...

Page 665: ...feature using the Mitel Web UI or using the configuration files startup cfg model cfg and mac cfg An Administrator can enable Auto Resync using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI In the configuration files you set the following parameters auto resync mode Determines whether the configuration server automatically updates the phone s configuration files only the firmware only both the firmw...

Page 666: ...During an auto resync the IP phones have the ability to initiate a comparison of its local directory files with those located on the configuration server and automatically update the local directory files if changes are detected If the auto resync mode is set to Configuration Files 1 or Both 3 either through the IP phone s Web UI or configuration files when the phone reaches the configured auto re...

Page 667: ...dates the configuration files on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed Firmware Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed CONFIGURATION FILES Notes 1 If a user is accessing the Mitel Web UI they are not informed of an auto reboot 2 Any changes made using the Mitel Web UI or the...

Page 668: ...he time you designated Notes 1 If a user is accessing the Mitel Web UI they are not informed of an auto reboot 2 Any changes made using the Mitel Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto resync update Auto resync affects the configuration files only However the settings in the Mitel Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files 3 The resync time is based o...

Page 669: ...Chapter 9 TROUBLESHOOTING ...

Page 670: ...ay page 9 12 Error Messages Display page 9 14 Warning Message Display page 9 15 Configuration and Crash File Retrieval page 9 16 Tcpdump Network Packet Capture Support page 9 19 Troubleshooting Solutions page 9 21 Why does my phone display Application missing page 9 21 Why does my phone display the No Service message page 9 22 Why does my phone display Bad Encrypted Config page 9 22 Why is my phon...

Page 671: ...ory Block Size Mitel Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform troubleshooting tasks LOG SETTINGS Using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI you can specify the location where log information will be stored for troubleshooting purposes In the configuration files you use the following parameters to configure log settings log server ip The IP address of the log server...

Page 672: ...ort purposes Mitel recommends Administrators leave the debug level at its default for normal production use Enabling all the debug levels on the phone may impact performance and normal operation of the phone MITEL WEB UI PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION FILE PARAMETERS LINMGR Line Manager information log module linemgr UI User Interface UI related log module user interface MISC Miscellaneous log module mi...

Page 673: ...he above example fatal errors general errors and warnings are logged for the line manager user interface and SIP call control modules Example 2 Functions and Info 16 32 48 log module dis 48 log module net 48 log module snd 48 In the above example functions and general information are logged for the display drivers network and sound modules Example 3 log module rtpt 0 log module ind 65535 In the ab...

Page 674: ...and troubleshoot as necessary In the Support Information section you can Get local cfg Get server cfg Get user cfg if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature see Visitor Desk Phone Support on page 68 for details Get user _local cfg if logged on using the Visitor Desk Phone feature see Visitor Desk Phone Support on page 68 for details Show Task and Stack Status Mitel Technical Support uses t...

Page 675: ...owing procedures to perform troubleshooting on the IP phone via the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files see the section Log Settings on page A 300 CONFIGURATION FILES Free Memory Max Memory Block Size ...

Page 676: ... e the server to which log information will be transmitted 3 In the Log Port field enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the Log IP field This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location 4 Click Save Settings to save your settings 5 Click on Operation Reset 6 In the Restart Phone field click Restart to restart the IP phone MITEL WEB UI ...

Page 677: ...ield click Restart to restart the IP phone To perform support tasks 12 To store the local configuration file to the specified location click on Save As in the Get local cfg field 13 To store the server configuration file to the specified location click on Save As in the Get server cfg field 14 To display task and stack status information as well as Free Memory and Maximum Block Free Memory on the ...

Page 678: ...d When the phone detects a failure i e a crash it automatically reboots You can view a WatchDog crash file using the Mitel Web UI at the path Advanced Settings Troubleshooting You can enable disable the WatchDog task using the configuration files or the Mitel Web UI ENABLING DISABLING WATCHDOG Use the following procedure to enable disable the WatchDog For specific parameters you can set in the con...

Page 679: ...lick on Advanced Settings Troubleshooting Enable Disable WatchDog Task 2 The WatchDog field is enabled by default To disable the WatchDog task click in the Enabled box to clear the check mark 3 Click Save Settings to save your changes View the Crash Log 4 To view a crash log in the Get a Crash Log field click the SAVE AS button You can open the file immediately or you can save the Crash Log to you...

Page 680: ... supported in this release and a description of what the codes mean REBOOT CODE DESCRIPTION WEBUI Restart Reboot prompted by pressing the Restart button in the Operation Reset Phone menu of the Web UI or by changing the network configuration settings through the Web UI AutoResync NeedResync Reboot prompted by the processing of a NOTIFY check sync command AutoResync Timeout Reboot prompted due to s...

Page 681: ...nd XMLCommand FastReboot Reboot prompted by the processing of a FastReboot XML command XMLCommand ClearLocal Reboot prompted by the processing of a ClearLocal XML command PHONEAPP DHCP_NEW Reboot prompted by the IP address of the phone dynamically changing via DHCP Note In this scenario reboot information is not logged in the syslog but is displayed on the Error Messages section of the Troubleshoo...

Page 682: ...lso displays After a reboot the previous error messages are discarded and if applicable new error messages display If there are no error messages during startup or after a reboot the message No Error Messages displays on the screen Error messages display in the language currently set on the phone The following table identifies the possible error messages that may display POSSIBLE ERROR MESSAGE DES...

Page 683: ...t generated during startup 1 Click on Advanced Settings Troubleshooting Error Messages 2 Scroll down to the Error Messages section to view the error messages that may have generated during startup or reboot of the IP Phone WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY Previously when a phone fails to download from the first configuration server as listed in the Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN server list it attempts t...

Page 684: ...e_Time_crash gz MAC ID_Date_Time_summary log and MAC ID_Date_Time_reboot log The following table identifies the methods you can use to retrieve support information from the phone to the pre defined server when the above configuration parameters are enabled Notes 1 The phone performs the generation and sending of Support Information in the background This feature does not affect the use or operatio...

Page 685: ...C ID_Date_Time_crash gz that contains information about a current phone error crash caus ing a reboot of the phone The MAC address date and time are specified in the file name to identify the phone sending the information and the date and time the crash occurred The crash file is compressed as in gzip format for example 00033D000111_2010 02 27_0204pm_crash gz summary log File in the format MAC ID_...

Page 686: ...key The following prompt displays Upload System Info Files 4 Press Yes The phone immediately generates the applicable Support Information files server cfg local cfg and or crash gz and sends the files to the pre defined server The message Files Sent displays GENERATINGANDSENDINGSUPPORTINFORMATIONFROMTHEMITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to generate and send Support Information files to the s...

Page 687: ...ure file to the desired directory Start Stop Allows you to start stop the tcpdump capture CONFIGURING ENABLING TCPDUMP CAPTURE FUNCTIONALITY USING THE MITEL WEB UI Use the following procedure to configure enable Tcpdump capture functionality using the Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings Capture Notes 1 Tcpdump capture functionality in this release supports phone side capture and storage for troubl...

Page 688: ...0 2 Use a colon i e or hyphen i e to set a range For example 5000 6000 or 5000 6000 will capture traffic from ports 5000 through to 6000 3 Use a semi colon i e to add individual ports For example 5000 6000 7000 will capture traffic from ports 5000 6000 and 7000 4 Ranges and individual ports can be combined For example 5000 7000 8000 will capture traffic from ports 5000 through to 7000 as well as c...

Page 689: ...nable to receive an IP from the DHCP server or has lost its record of its static IP the phone auto assigns itself the default IP 192 168 0 50 To recover the firmware for your phone in this circumstance please perform the following 1 Launch your web browser on your computer 2 In the URL type http IP Address where IP Address is the IP Address displayed on the phone Your browser launches the Mitel IP...

Page 690: ...vanced Settings Global SIP is correct Check the sip registrar ip parameter in the configuration files is correct WHY DOES MY PHONE DISPLAY BAD ENCRYPTED CONFIG The IP phone displays Bad Encrypted Config because encrypted configuration files are enabled but the decryption process has failed Specific cases where decryption fails are REASON The site specific password in security tuz does not match th...

Page 691: ... or qualified domain name for the TFTP server into your IP phone configuration Additionally the phone may not be receiving the TFTP IP address if there are other DHCP servers within the same broadcast domain providing different Option 66 TFTP server settings See DHCP on page 4 for more information on option precedence For procedures on configuring the TFTP server using the IP phone UI and the Mite...

Page 692: ...start phone 3 Select Yes to restart the phone or Select No to go back to the Options Screen For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Restart icon The following prompt displays Restart phone 3 Select Yes to restart the phone or Select No to go back to the Options Screen 1 Click on Operation Reset Phone 2 Click Restart to restart the phone IP PHONE UI Note To cancel t...

Page 693: ...ghted press the Select softkey The Factory Default prompt displays 5 Select Yes to factory default the phone The phone immediately sets the phone to factory defaults and automatically restarts the phone For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Advanced softkey 3 Enter the Administrator password and press the blue Enter key Default is 22222 4 Press the Reset icon 5 W...

Page 694: ... local config prompt displays Press to confirm For the 6867i 6869i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press theAdvanced softkey and enter yourAdministrator password using the keypad keys Default is 22222 3 Select Reset 4 Select Erase Local Config 5 With Erase Local Config highlighted press the Select softkey The Erase Local Configuration prompt displays 6 Select Yes to erase the loca...

Page 695: ...removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone HOW TO RESET A USER S PASSWORD For the 6863i 6865i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select User Password 3 Enter the current user password 4 Press Enter 5 Enter the new user password 6 Press Enter 7 Re enter the new user password 8 Press Enter A message Password Changed displays on the screen Note If required swip...

Page 696: ...splays on the screen For the 6873i 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Press the Lock icon 3 Press the Password icon 4 Enter the current password in the Current Password field 5 Enter the new password in the New Password field 6 Enter the new password again in the Re enter Password field 7 Press the Save softkey A message Password Changed displays on the screen 1 Click on Operation Us...

Page 697: ... and press Enter The phone unlocks 6867I 6869I Lock the phone 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List 2 Select Lock Phone Lock The prompt Lock the phone displays 3 Select Yes to lock the phone Unlock the phone 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List An Enter Unlock Password prompt displays 2 Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 A prompt Unlock the...

Page 698: ... or administrator password and press Enter Default is 22222 A prompt Unlock the Phone displays 3 Select Yes to unlock the phone 1 Click on Operation Phone Lock Lock the phone 2 In the Lock the Phone field click Lock The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message Phone is locked Unlock the phone 3 Click on Operation Phone Lock 4 In the Unlock the Phone field click Unlock The phone u...

Page 699: ...Appendix A CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS ...

Page 700: ...gs page A 18 User Dial Plan Setting page A 18 Mitel Web UI Settings page A 19 Secure Web Service Settings page A 19 Configuration Server Settings page A 20 Multiple Configuration Server Settings page A 29 Rport Setting page A 30 Local SIP UDP TCP Port Setting page A 30 Local SIP TLS Port page A 31 SIP Keep Alive Support page A 31 HTTPS Client and Server Settings page A 32 HTTPS Server Certificate ...

Page 701: ...ence page A 93 Conference Transfer in Live Dial Mode page A 93 HTTP HTTPS Authentication Support for BroadSoft CMS page A 94 Advanced SIP Settings page A 95 Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings page A 102 As Feature Event Subscription Settings page A 103 Transport Layer Security TLS Settings page A 104 802 1x Support Settings page A 110 RTP Codec DTMF Global Settings page A 115 Autodial Setti...

Page 702: ...Timeout page A 178 Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call page A 179 Stuttered Dial Tone Setting page A 180 Message Waiting Indicator Settings page A 180 Message Waiting Indicator Request URI Setting page A 180 DND Key Mode Settings page A 181 Priority Alert Settings page A 182 Bellcore Cadence Settings page A 187 SIP Diversion Display page A 189 Display Name Customization Settings page A 190 Language ...

Page 703: ...eddial Keypad Key Settings page A 239 Expansion Module Key Settings for M680i and M685i page A 240 Hard Key Settings page A 246 Customizing the Key Type List page A 251 Locking Keys page A 252 Locking the SAVE and DELETE Keys page A 255 Enabling Disabling Ability to Add Edit Speeddial Keys page A 256 BLF List URI Settings page A 256 BLF Page Switch page A 257 Configurable Display Modes for BLF and...

Page 704: ...ow and Allow Event Headers page A 283 P Asserted Identity PAI page A 283 Route Header in SIP Packet page A 284 Compact SIP Header page A 284 Rejection of INV or BYE page A 284 Configuration Encryption Setting page A 285 DNS Host File page A 285 DNS Server Query page A 285 DNS Maximum Cache TTL Settings page A 287 SIP Services RTCP Summary Reports Transport Protocol Settings page A 288 Alphanumeric...

Page 705: ...For information about configuration file precedence see Chapter 1 the section Configuration File Precedence on page 1 25 This section includes the following types of configurable parameters Operational Basic and Advanced Parameters on page A 8 Mapping Key Settings on page A 212 Softkey Programmable Key Keypad Key Expansion Module Key Hard Key Parameters on page A 217 Advanced Operational Parameter...

Page 706: ...ONS MENU PARAMETER options simple menu CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to enable a simplified options menu or enable the full menu on the IP Phone UI WARNING WHEN USING THE SIMPLIFIED MENU YOU CANNOT CHANGE THE NETWORK SETTINGS FROM THE IP PHONE UI IF THE NETWORK SETTINGS BECOME MISCONFIGURED YOU MUST USE THE MITEL WEB UI TO CONFIGURE THE NETWORK SETTINGS O...

Page 707: ...address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 enabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE dhcp 1 PARAMETER ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter assigns a static IP address to the IP phone device Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support ...

Page 708: ...ress settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of an IP address With the help of the DNS servers the domain names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding IP addresses Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE dns1 192 168 0 5 PARAMETER dns...

Page 709: ... Duplex 100Mbps 6 Half Duplex 1000Mbps applicable for the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP phones only EXAMPLE ethernet port 0 4 PARAMETER ethernet port 1 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The send TX and receive RX method to use on Ethernet port 1 to transmit and receive data over the LAN FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 Auto Negotiate 1 Full Duplex 10Mbps 2 Full D...

Page 710: ...ble EXAMPLE pc port passthru enabled 1 PARAMETER hostname CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet Note If you change this parameter you must restart your phone for the change to take affect FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE model MAC IP Address RANGE Up to 64 alpha numeric characters Note The va...

Page 711: ...ULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled Sends only the identifier value 1 Enabled Sends the identifier value firmware version and bootrom version EXAMPLE dhcp opt60 extended vendor class 1 PARAMETER dhcp userclass CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the configuration server with the DHCP Request packet Note...

Page 712: ... FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE use dhcp option 120 1 PARAMETER dhcp config option override CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server Note You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take affect FORMAT Integer DEFAU...

Page 713: ...RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE dhcp option 132 vlan id enabled 0 PARAMETER admin password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone Note The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords If you enter a password with alpha characters the phone uses the default password instead FORMAT Integer DEFAULT...

Page 714: ... UI If the password is entered correctly the user is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other password protected screens If the user fails to enter the correct password in three attempts access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen Note The password to enter is the administrator password configured for that phone ...

Page 715: ... international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile phone networks In all European Union countries it is also the emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed line telephones 110 A police and or fire emergency number in Asia Europe Middle East and South America Dial plan characters Length bytes 911 14 4xx 18 x xx 35 911 999 112 110 450 54 911 112 011XX 101XX 1 2 3 XXXXXXXXX 4 5 XXXXXX...

Page 716: ...e disabled Additionally the only way the call can be terminated is if the emergency services agent ends the call FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE emergency call connection hold enabled 1 PARAMETER sip user parameter dial plan CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The dial plan that the network uses to distinguish between a real ...

Page 717: ...web interface blacklist duration CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that the IP of the phone s Web UI attacker will remain on the blacklist FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3600 1 hour RANGE 0 9999999 seconds Note A value 0 will disable the blacklist feature EXAMPLE web interface blacklist duration 600 PARAMETER secure web serv...

Page 718: ...this parameter to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address or qualified domain name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE tftp server 192 168 0 130 PARAMETER tftp path CONFIGURAT...

Page 719: ...ONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone Note Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6867i configfiles FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 256 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE alternate tftp path configs alternate...

Page 720: ... A EXAMPLE ftp server 192 168 0 131 PARAMETER ftp path CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone Note Enter the path name in the form folderX folderX folderX For example ipphone 6867i configfiles FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 256 alphanumeric characters ...

Page 721: ...ownloaded into the phone Optional You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server See the next parameter http path Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE http server 192 168 0 132 PARAMETER http path CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg ...

Page 722: ...ion file has been downloaded into the phone Optional You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS server See the next parameter https path Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE https server 192 168 0 143 PARAMETER https path CONFIGURATION FILE...

Page 723: ... model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTPS Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 66 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 443 RANGE 1 through 65535 EXAMPLE https port 1025 ...

Page 724: ...er have changed Both 3 Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed Notes If a user is accessing the Mitel Web UI they are not informed of an auto reboot Any changes made using the Mitel Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an auto resync update Auto resync affects the configuration files only However the setti...

Page 725: ...an be entered as 02 56 Auto Resync adds as a default 15 minutes of random time to the configured time For example if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02 00 the event takes place any time between 02 00 and 02 15 This max delay can be configured using the auto resync max delay parameter below When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish you must enter the time in the format 00h...

Page 726: ...c cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations Note A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock reads the proper time A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 364 EXAMPLE auto resync days 1 ...

Page 727: ...N Specifies either a full or partial URL of a server other than the original configuration server from which the phones in the network get their firmware Note The default method for the update of firmware to the phones is from the original configuration server The Administrator must specify a correct server URL for the phones to get their firmware information from that server If the URL is incorre...

Page 728: ...ALUE 0 RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE sip rport 1 PARAMETER sip local port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the local source port UDP TCP from which the phone sends SIP messages FORMAT Numeric DEFAULT VALUE 5060 RANGE Greater than 1024 and less than 65535 Notes It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport By defaul...

Page 729: ... When symmetric TLS is enabled the IP phone uses port 5061 as the persistent TLS connection source port When symmetric TLS signaling is disabled the IP phone chooses a random persistent TLS connection source port from the TCP range i e 49152 65535 for TLS messages after each reboot regardless of whether the parameter sip outbound support is enabled or disabled EXAMPLE sip local tls port 5061 PARAM...

Page 730: ...ll attempt to communicate using SSL 3 0 only SSL 3 0 is a commonly used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet TLS Preferred The phone will initially attempt to communicate using TLS 1 0 If the TLS protocol is rejected the phone will automatically switch to the SSL 3 0 protocol FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE TLS Preferred RANGE TLS 1 0 SSL 3 0 TL...

Page 731: ...E 0 disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs RANGE 0 disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs 1 enables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs EXAMPLE https block http post xml 1 PARAMETER https validate certificates CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone When this parameter is set to 1 the HTTPS client performs validation on S...

Page 732: ...red prior to accepting the certificate Note If the https validate expires parameter is set to enable the clock on the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 enabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE https validate expires 0 PARAMETER https validate hostname CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the HTTP...

Page 733: ...tificate from another specified server To download a specific file the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example https user certificates ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesHTTPSUserCert pem where path is the directory and phonesHTTPSUserCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT Alphanumeric string...

Page 734: ... cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones This is a global setting FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE tagging enabled 1 PARAMETER priority non ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the priority value for non IP packets This is a global setting FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 5 RANGE 0 to 7 EXAMPLE priority non ip 7 ...

Page 735: ...red VLAN ID before being forwarded to the PC port Example You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the vlan id to 4095 and the vlan id port 1 to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the PC port to be on VLAN 3 but the LAN port is configured as untagged tagging enabled 1 vlan id 4095 vlan id port 1 3 Alternatively setting the vlan id to any ID from 1 to 4094 and vlan id po...

Page 736: ... value for SIP RTP and RTCP packets You enter the tos priority map value as follows DSCP_1 Priority_1 DSCP_2 Priority_2 DSCP_64 Priority_64 where the DSCP value range is 0 63 and the priority range is 0 7 Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma or with values outside the ranges are ignored FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 based on the default ToS DSCP SIP setting of 26 5 base...

Page 737: ... to 4095 and the vlan id to any ID from 1 to 4094 The following example sets the LAN port to be on VLAN 3 but the PC port is configured as untagged tagging enabled 1 vlan id 3 vlan id port 1 4095 Alternatively setting the vlan id port 1 to any ID from 1 to 4094 and vlan id to 4095 will allow frames from the PC port containing a VLAN ID to be untagged before being forwarded to the LAN port and fram...

Page 738: ...mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the hostname server for which to send collect the RTCP summary reports You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter FORMAT username server Note Hostname server string must not exceed 128 characters in length DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip rtcp summary report collector collector example org PARAMETER sip rtcp summary report collector por...

Page 739: ...FAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip line1 rtcp summary reports 1 PARAMETER sip lineN rtcp summary report collector where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Per line parameter specifying the hostname of the server receiving the RTCP summary reports Note You must restart the phone after setting a value for this parameter FORMAT usern...

Page 740: ...the phone after setting a value for this parameter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 to 65536 EXAMPLE sip line1 rtcp summary report collector port 5060 PARAMETER tos sip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP for SIP packets FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 26 RANGE 0 63 EXAMPLE tos sip 3 PARAMETER tos rtp CONFIGURATION FILES star...

Page 741: ...arameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format Use 0 for the 12 hour format and 1 for the 24 hour format FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 12 hr format 1 24 hr format EXAMPLE time format 0 PARAMETER date format CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 WWW MM...

Page 742: ...Guide A 44 PARAMETER dst config CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables disables the use of daylight savings time FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 RANGE 0 OFF 1 30 min summertime 2 1 hr summertime 3 automatic EXAMPLE dst config 0 ...

Page 743: ...e additional parameters in the section Custom Time Zone and DST Settings on page A 52 When DHCP Option 2 is enabled on the phone the phone still uses the custom timezone configuration settings to control daylight savings time The default behavior for the phone is to use the NTP server from Option 42 or current configuration setting and the current timezone settings FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE US Eas...

Page 744: ...Andorra AE Dubai AG Antigua AI Anguilla AL Tirane AN Curacao AR Buenos Aires AR Saudi Arabia AS Pago Pago AT Vienna AU Lord Howe AU Tasmania AU Melbourne AU Sydney AU Broken Hill AU Brisbane AU Lindeman AU Adelaide AU Darwin AU Perth AW Aruba AZ Baku CET GST AST AST CET AST ART ART BST CET LHS EST EST EST CST EST EST CST CST WST AST AZT ...

Page 745: ...unepe BR Rio Branco BS Nassau BY Minsk BZ Belize EET AST CET EET AST BOT FNT BRT BRT BRT BRS BRT BRS AMS AMT AMT AMT ACT ACT EST EET CST CA Newfoundland CA Atlantic CA Eastern CA Saskatchewan CA Central CA Mountain CA Pacific CA Yukon CH Zurich CK Rarotonga CL Santiago CL Easter CN Beijing CO Bogota CR Costa Rica CU Havana CY Nicosia CZ Prague NST AST EST EST CST MST PST PST CET CKS CLS EAS CST CO...

Page 746: ... London GB Belfast GD Grenada GE Tbilisi GF Cayenne GI Gibraltar GP Guadeloupe GR Athens GS South Georgia GT Guatemala GU Guam GY Guyana GMT GMT AST GET GFT CET AST EET GST CST CST GYT HK Hong Kong HN Tegucigalpa HR Zagreb HT Port au Prince HU Budapest HKS CST CET EST CET IE Dublin IS Reykjavik IT Rome GMT GMT CET JM Jamaica JP Tokyo EST JST KY Cayman EST LC St Lucia LI Vaduz LT Vilnius LU Luxembo...

Page 747: ...rey MX Mazatlan MX Chihuahua MX Hermosillo MX Tijuana CET EET CET AST AST CET MUT CST CST CST CST MST MST MST PST NI Managua NL Amsterdam NO Oslo NR Nauru NU Niue NZ Auckland NZ Chatham CST CET CET NRT NUT NZS CHA OM Muscat GST PA Panama PE Lima PL Warsaw PR Puerto Rico PT Lisbon PT Madeira PT Azores PY Asuncion EST PES CET AST WET WET AZO PYS TIME ZONE NAME TIME ZONE CODE ...

Page 748: ...ET MSK SAM YEK OMS NOV KRA IRK YAK VLA SAK MAG PET ANA SA Saudi Arabia SE Stockholm SG Singapore SI Ljubljana SK Bratislava SM San Marino SR Paramaribo SV El Salvador AST CET SGT CET CET CET SRT CST TR Istanbul TT Port of Spain TW Taipei EET AST CST UA Kiev US Eastern US Central US Mountain US Pacific US Alaska US Aleutian US Hawaii UY Montevideo EET EST CST MST PST AKS HAS HST UYS VA Vatican VE C...

Page 749: ...s or qualified domain name If the time server is enabled the value for time server1 will be used to request the time Note For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 42 FORMAT IP address or qualified domain name DEFAULT VALUE 1 mitel pool ntp org RANGE N A EXAMPLE time server1 192 168 0 5 PARAMETER time server2 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg ma...

Page 750: ...this parameter your DHCP server must support Option 42 FORMAT IP address or qualified domain name DEFAULT VALUE 3 mitel pool ntp org RANGE N A EXAMPLE time server3 192 168 0 5 Note To use the parameters in this section the time zone name parameter must be set to Custom See page A 45 for more information PARAMETER time zone minutes CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The n...

Page 751: ...urs Newfoundland Standard Time North America 180 GMT minus 3 hours 150 GMT minus 2 5 hours Newfoundland daylight time 120 GMT minus 2 hours 60 GMT minus 1 hour 0 GMT 0 hours Greenwich Mean Time 60 GMT 1 hour Central European Time 120 GMT 2 hours Eastern European Time Europe 180 GMT 3 hours 210 GMT 3 5 hours 240 GMT 4 hours 270 GMT 4 5 hours 300 GMT 5 hours 330 GMT 5 5 hours 345 GMT 5 75 hours 360 ...

Page 752: ...tart relative date CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies how to interpret the start day month and week parameters absolute 0 or relative 1 FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 absolute 1 relative EXAMPLE dst start relative date 1 PARAMETER dst end relative date CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies how to interpret the end day...

Page 753: ...nuary 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December EXAMPLE dst start month 7 PARAMETER dst end month CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The month that DST ends Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 Sep...

Page 754: ...h that DST ends Valid values are 1 to 31 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 31 EXAMPLE dst end day 31 PARAMETER dst start hour CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The hour that DST starts Valid values are an integer from 0 midnight to 23 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 midnight to 23 EXAMPLE dst start hour 0 PARAMETER dst end hour CONFIGURATION FILES startu...

Page 755: ...uary 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December EXAMPLE dst start month 6 PARAMETER dst end month CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The month that DST ends Valid values are 1 to 12 January to December FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 Sept...

Page 756: ...urrence dst start day in the month 5 fifth full week of month 5 fifth last occurrence dst start day in the month EXAMPLE dst start week 1 PARAMETER dst end week CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The week in the specified month in which DST ends Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 first full week of month 1 l...

Page 757: ...day 1 PARAMETER dst end day CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday EXAMPLE dst end day 7 PARAMETER dst start hour CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg m...

Page 758: ...o The Auto setting sets the phone to turn off the backlight after a period of inactivity You can set the amount of time before the backlight goes off using the Backlight on Time option bl on time parameter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Auto RANGE 0 Off Turns the backlight off constant 1 Auto Turns the backlight off after a period of inactivity Note In the IP Phone UI the options for this paramete...

Page 759: ... cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the brightness level when the phone is active FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 RANGE 1 5 EXAMPLE brightness level 5 PARAMETER inactivity brightness level CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the brightness level when the phone is inactive FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 0 4 where 0 represents screen off EXAMPLE inactivity brightness ...

Page 760: ...tps server image jpg EXAMPLE background image http 10 30 100 233 pics image png Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER idle screen mode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to switch between the two Home Idle screen modes The primary screen mode provides users with a larger date and time and displays the Screen Name sip screen name param...

Page 761: ... 6873i IP phones FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE blue RANGE blue white black EXAMPLE idle screen font color white Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER screen save time CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the amount of time in seconds the phone must be idle before the 6867i 6869i 6873i IP phone s screen saver initiates FORMAT Integer ...

Page 762: ...List and or Outgoing Redial List entry the generic blue figure image is shown Pictures must be in png format and 150 pixels wide x 150 pixels tall For the 6867i 6869i 6873i the png can be 24 bit or 32 bit The filenames for pictures must be stored using the phone number as the filename for example 9995551234 png Notes Entering no value for this parameter disables this feature The image server uri p...

Page 763: ...n Guide FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disable DHSG support is OFF 1 enable DHSG support is ON EXAMPLE dhsg 1 PARAMETER live dialpad CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Turns the Live Dialpad feature ON or OFF With live dial pad ON the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed With live dial pad OF...

Page 764: ... 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE live keyboard 1 PARAMETER keyboard script CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI to be called when an alphabetic key on a K680i keyboard attached to a 6867i or 6869i SIP phone is pressed If this parameter is not defined or left blank the phone s native Directory search function will be launched Note The Liv...

Page 765: ...xxx when a user has to dial 9 to get and outside line and needs a secondary dialtone presented You can configure prefix dialling by adding a prepend digit to the dial string For example if you add a prepend map of 2 9 XXXXXXXXX 91 the IP phone adds the digits 91 to any 10 digit number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out Other examples of prepend mappings are 1X 9 Prepends 9 to ...

Page 766: ...xy in the dial string When disabled default the hash pound key acts as a dial plan terminator FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled used as a dial plan terminator 1 Enabled sent as 23 in dial string EXAMPLE sip dial plan terminator 1 PARAMETER sip digit timeout CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Represents the time in seconds between consecutive key pr...

Page 767: ...ished since the phone uses the local port 5061 for connection If the Global SIP parameter TLS is set on the phone more than one connection can be setup since the phone uses a random local port for connection This parameter must be enabled for this feature to start keep alive for a particular transport FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip outbound support 1 PARAMETE...

Page 768: ...econd line on the screen of the phone Notes If other status messages display on the phone such as Network Disconnected the Screen Name 2 value does not display Symbol characters are allowed such as If the text is longer than the display width than the display truncates the text to fit the display FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip sc...

Page 769: ...hanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip display name Joe Smith PARAMETER sip auth name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip auth name 5553456 PARAMETER sip password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac c...

Page 770: ...ARAMETER sip bla number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP phones FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip bla number 1010 PARAMETER sip mode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to configure the mode of the line Applicable values are Generic Normal line Bro...

Page 771: ...nfigured The phone can only transfer the currently active call or accept transferred calls if there is no active calls If call waiting is disabled intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected pre dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not w...

Page 772: ...e is audible only once on the active call FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 4294967295 EXAMPLE call waiting tone period 30 PARAMETER sip proxy ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to send all SIP requests A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by the IP phone to the t...

Page 773: ...NGE N A EXAMPLE sip backup proxy port 5060 PARAMETER sip outbound proxy CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the address of the outbound proxy server All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server For example if you have a Session Border Controller in your network then you would normally set its address here FORMAT IP Address or fully qualified...

Page 774: ...l active and you can dial using username ip address of the phone If the Registrar IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 for a per line basis i e line 1 line 2 etc then the register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip registrar ip 192 168...

Page 775: ...the backup register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip backup registrar ip 192 168 0 102 PARAMETER sip backup registrar port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup registrar s typically the bac...

Page 776: ...ure the sip backup outbound proxy on a global basis FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip backup outbound proxy drax us mitel com PARAMETER sip backup outbound proxy port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup outbound proxy port on the backup outbound proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP messages ...

Page 777: ...xt DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip line1 screen name Joe Smith PARAMETER sip lineN screen name 2 where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone Notes If other status messages display on the phone such as Network Disconnected the Screen Name 2 value does not displ...

Page 778: ...haracters EXAMPLE sip line1 user name 1010 PARAMETER sip lineN display name where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field Some IP PBX systems use this as the caller s ID and some may overwrite this with the string that is set at the PBX system FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric ch...

Page 779: ...p lineN password where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The password that will be used to register at the registrar FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 20 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE sip line1 password 12345 ...

Page 780: ...he value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone For example if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101 and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102 etc you would configure BLA on a per line basis for the ININ server as follows sip line1 user name 10101 fo...

Page 781: ...ws you to configure the mode of the line Applicable values are Generic Normal line BroadSoft SCA Shared Call Line Appearances SCA line for BroadWorks network call activity can go to more than one phone BLA Bridged Line Appearance BLA line FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE Valid values are 0 Generic 1 BroadSoft SCA 2 Reserved 3 BLA EXAMPLE sip line1 mode 2 ...

Page 782: ...e user is on a call any further incoming calls will receive busy unless Call Forward Busy or Call Forward No Answer and Busy is configured on the phone It will then forward the call according to the rule configured The phone can only transfer the currently active call or accept transferred calls if there is no active calls If call waiting is disabled intercom calls are treated as regular incoming ...

Page 783: ...VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 proxy ip 192 168 0 101 PARAMETER sip lineN proxy port where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The proxy server s port number FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 proxy port 5060 PARAMETER sip lineN backup proxy ip where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTIO...

Page 784: ...is the address of the outbound proxy server All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server For example if you have a Session Border Controller in your network then you would normally set its address here FORMAT IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip outbound proxy 10 42 23 13 PARAMETER sip lineN outbound proxy port where N line nu...

Page 785: ... can dial using username ip address of the phone If the Registrar IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 for a per line basis i e line 1 line 2 etc then the register request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 registrar ip 192 168 0 101 PAR...

Page 786: ...ister request is not sent the No Service message does not display and the message waiting indicator MWI does not come on FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 backup registrar ip 192 168 0 102 PARAMETER sip lineN backup registrar port where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup registrar s...

Page 787: ...p outbound proxy on a per line basis FORMAT IP address or fully qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip line1 backup outbound proxy drax us mitel com PARAMETER sip lineN backup outbound proxy port where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The backup outbound proxy port on the backup outbound proxy server to which the IP phone sends ...

Page 788: ... enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur The MWI re subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the sip explicit mwi subscription period parameter to re subscribe Whether or not the sip mwi for bla account parameter is enabled the priority for displaying MWI does not change FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip mwi for bla acc...

Page 789: ...P phone as follows To disable centralized conferencing leave this field empty blank To enable SIP centralized conferencing then do one of the following actions If you have specified a proxy server registrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf you specify c...

Page 790: ...gistrar server then to reach the media server via the proxy server set this field to one of the following conf Sylantro server or Conference BroadSoft server By setting this field to conf you specify conf proxy_server _address proxy_port For example if the proxy server address is 206 229 26 60 and the proxy port used is 10060 then by setting this parameter to conf you are specifying the following ...

Page 791: ...d 1 enabled EXAMPLE custom adhoc conference 1 PARAMETER sip join support CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the phone to allow a conference to be set up with a join header as described in RFC 3911 FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip join support 1 PARAMETER confxfer live dial CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg m...

Page 792: ...the phone after setting the HTTP HTTPS digest authentication parameters FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE aastra RANGE Up to 40 alphanumeric characters EXAMPLE http digest username myusername PARAMETER http digest password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the password to use for HTTP HTTPS digest authentication The server uses this password for authentication purpo...

Page 793: ...g model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider a Message Waiting Indicator MWI LED or display icon tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone You can enable and disable MWI by setting this parameter to the following 0 to disable 1 to enable FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE sip explicit mwi subscript...

Page 794: ...CRIPTION Adds an Aastra Line header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server where the value is the line number that is being registered FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip send line 1 PARAMETER sip session timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The time in seconds that the IP phone uses to send peri...

Page 795: ...timer defined in RFC 3261 Timer 2 represents the amount of time in milliseconds a non INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a request FORMAT Integer Default Value 0 Range N A Example sip T2 timer 8 PARAMETER sip transaction timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The amount of time in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver registrar proxy to respond t...

Page 796: ...ne uses Persistent TLS you MUST specify the Trusted Certificates the Root and Intermediate Certificates the Local Certificate and the Private Key are optional This parameter implies keep alive mechanism For more information about Persistent TLS see Transport Layer Security TLS Settings on page A 104 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 UDP RANGE Valid values are 0 User Datagram Protocol UDP and Transmis...

Page 797: ...fg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The threshold value in seconds prior to expiration that the phone renews registrations The phone will automatically send registration renewals half way through the registration period unless half way is more than the threshold value For example if the threshold value is set to 60 seconds and if the registration period is 600 seconds the renewal REGISTER message will be sent ...

Page 798: ...RIPTION Applicable for all event packages this parameter controls how long the phone delays then retries a subscription when a SUBSCRIBE request is responded with error codes other than 408 timeout or 503 service unavailable Note If set to 0 or an invalid value is set the parameter will not take effect FORMAT Seconds DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 1 3600 EXAMPLE sip subscription failed retry timer 30 PARAM...

Page 799: ...that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server If you specify zero 0 the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server If no value is specified the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 300 RANGE 0 3700 Note Whensettozero 0 thephoneusesBLAexpiryvaluespecified in subscribe message E...

Page 800: ...eceives notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B Note You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to phone B in the above example FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip missed call summary subscription 1 PARAMETER sip missed call summary subscription p...

Page 801: ... C When phone A calls phone B the server forwards the call to phone C If you enable the sip missed call summary subscription parameter phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B Note You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to phone B in the above example FORMAT Boolean DEF...

Page 802: ...rsistent tls CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security TLS Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re uses that connection for all calls from the phone The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone If the phones are set to use Persistent TLS and ...

Page 803: ...teger Default Value 0 Disabled Range 0 3600 Example sip persistent tls keep alive 10 PARAMETER sip send sips over tls CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows administrators the ability to manually configure the IP phones to use either the SIP or SIPS URI scheme when TLS or persistent TLS is enabled FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Enabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled Use SIP URI...

Page 804: ...r To download a certificate from another specified server To download a specific file the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example sips root and intermediate certificates ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesRootCert pem where path is the directory and phonesRootCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below N...

Page 805: ...ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesLocalCert pem where path is the directory and phonesLocalCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below Note The certificate file must use the format pem To create specific certificate files to use on your IP phone contact Mitel Technical Support FORMAT filename pem DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE T...

Page 806: ...e sips private key ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesPrivatekey pem where path is the directory and phonesPrivateKey pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below Note The key file must use the format pem To create specific private key files to use on your IP phone contact Mitel Technical Support FORMAT filename pem DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE ...

Page 807: ...erver To download a certificate from another specified server To download a specific file the string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example sips trusted certificates ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phonesTrustedCert pem where path is the directory and phonesTrustedCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below Note ...

Page 808: ... intermediate certificates use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates 802 1x local certificate use 1 local certificate 802 1x private key 1 private key that corresponds to local certificate 802 1x trusted certificates 0 or more trusted certificates a maximum of 2 pc port passthrough enabled PARAMETER pc port passthru enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enable...

Page 809: ...he phone Note The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Mitel Web UI at the path Advanced Settings 802 1x Support General Identity FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE identity phone1 PARAMETER md5 password CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone Note The value you enter for thi...

Page 810: ...n admin 1 2 3 4 50 path phones802RootCer t pem where path is the directory and phones802RootCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE The following example downloads no 802 1x root and intermediate certificate file 802 1x root and intermediate certificates The following example download...

Page 811: ...ilename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT String Default Value N A Range N A Example The following example downloads no local certificate file 802 1x local certificate The following example downloads the local certificate file from the original configuration server 802 1x local certificate phones802LocalCert pem The following example uses FTP to...

Page 812: ...dmin 1 2 3 4 50 path phones802Trusted Cert pem where path is the directory and phones802TrustedCert pem is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE The following example downloads no 802 1x trusted certificate file 802 1x trusted certificates The following example downloads the 802 1x trusted cert...

Page 813: ...equests The following DTMF tones are supported Support signals 0 9 Support durations up to 5 seconds FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3000 RANGE N A EXAMPLE sip rtp port 3000 PARAMETER rtp symmetric port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION By default the phones support symmetrical RTP port handling i e the phone will only play an RTP stream if it comes from a source port that...

Page 814: ...riod in seconds whereby if no audio stream i e RTP packets is received in the defined amount of time the phone will send a BYE request thus releasing the call and returning the home idle screen FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 2147483647 seconds EXAMPLE sip no rtp timeout 240 PARAMETER sip use basic codecs CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disa...

Page 815: ...tet align 1 in SDP negotiate mode for incoming calls 2 Disable octet aligned mode and add octet align 0 in SDP negotiate mode for incoming calls EXAMPLE sip amr codec payload format 1 PARAMETER sip amr codec mode set CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the list of mode sets supported and also the preferred mode to use if multiple modes are supported by both side...

Page 816: ...bps 4 15 85 kbps 5 18 25 kbps 6 19 85 kbps 7 23 05 kbps 8 23 85 kbps EXAMPLE sip amr wb codec mode set 2 1 0 PARAMETER sip out of band dtmf CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables out of band DTMF Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out of band DTMF according to RFC2833 Note See Out of Band DTMF and DTMF Method on page 4 89 for DTMF behavior...

Page 817: ... G 726 40 97 G726 24 8000 G 726 24 98 G726 16 8000 G 726 16 110 G711u 16000 G711u 16K 111 G711a 16000 G711a 16K 112 L16 8000 L16 8K 113 L16 16000 L16 16K 115 G726 32 8000 G 726 32 118 AMR AMR Licensed feature 119 AMR WB G 722 2 AMR WB Licensed feature 121 G 722 1 G 722 1 Leave blank for all codecs All Codec 1 only Basic Codec 1 only None Codecs 2 through 10 only ptime in milliseconds 5 10 15 20 90...

Page 818: ...unction with the sip out of band dtmf parameter FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RTP RANGE 0 RTP 1 SIP INFO 2 BOTH EXAMPLE sip dtmf method 1 PARAMETER sip srtp mode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone as follows If set to 0 then disable SRTP If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred If set to 2 then SRTP calls on...

Page 819: ...silence suppression 0 PARAMETER sip remove silence suppression offer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the silence suppression attribute should be included in the Session Description Protocol SDP offer If enabled the silence suppression attribute will be removed from the SDP offer If disabled the attribute will not be removed from the SDP offer ...

Page 820: ... 0 RTP 1 SIP INFO 2 BOTH EXAMPLE sip line1 dtmf method 1 PARAMETER sip lineN srtp mode where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this line as follows If set to 1 then use the global setting for this line This is the default setting If set to 0 then disable SRTP If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred If set t...

Page 821: ...er 8500 PARAMETER sip autodial timeout CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Globally specifies the time in seconds that the phone waits to dial a pre configured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle If this parameter is set to 0 hotline the phone immediately dials a pre configured number when you lift the handset If this parameter is set to a value gr...

Page 822: ...EFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE Any valid SIP number EXAMPLE sip line1 autodial number 8500 PARAMETER sip lineN autodial timeout where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION On a per line basis this parameter specifies the time in seconds that the phone waits to dial a pre configured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle If this parameter is set to 0...

Page 823: ...f voicemails exceeds the limit Registered account numbers URIs that exceed the length of the screen either with or without the voicemail icon and the message count are truncated with an ellipse character at the end of the number URI string FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 99 EXAMPLE sip line1 vmail 97 Note In the above example the user would dial 97 to access the voicemail account PARAMETER...

Page 824: ... gray circle for the 6867i 6869i 6873i and the number of pending messages inside the circle and illuminate the softkey s LED 2 Display only a gray circle for the 6867i 6869i 6873i no indication of the number of pending messages and illuminate the softkey s LED EXAMPLE voice mail indicator 1 PARAMETER directory disabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disabl...

Page 825: ... string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example directory 1 tftp 10 30 102 158 path companylist csv where path is the directory and companylist csv is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE Example The following example downloads no directory directory 1 ...

Page 826: ...string value MUST HAVE A FILENAME at the end of the string For example directory 1 tftp 10 30 102 158 path companylist csv where path is the directory and companylist csv is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE Example The following example downloads no directory directory 1 T...

Page 827: ...FIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folder name of the directory defined in the directory 2 parameter FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Personal RANGE N A EXAMPLE directory 1 name Friends PARAMETER directory 1 enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the directory defined in the directory 1 parame...

Page 828: ...abled EXAMPLE directory 2 enabled 1 PARAMETER exchange server CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user s Microsoft Exchange server IP address or Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN FORMAT IP address or FQDN DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE exchange server mail acme com PARAMETER exchange use ssl CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTI...

Page 829: ... RANGE N A EXAMPLE exchange path custom_ews exchange asmx PARAMETER exchange user name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user s Microsoft Exchange user name FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE exchange user name jdoe PARAMETER exchange contacts enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the ...

Page 830: ...with TFTP FTP HTTP and HTTPS servers Notes The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone The value of 00 00 is 12 00 A M When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 for example the auto resync time can be entered as 02 56 Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured time For example if ...

Page 831: ...ck reads the proper time A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 364 EXAMPLE exchange contacts resync days 1 PARAMETER exchange contacts resync max delay CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the maximum time in minutes the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a Microso...

Page 832: ... Enterprise Directory feature and not applicable to user related Xsi features such as Speed Dial 8 Call Logs Hide Number and other Xsi directories Credentials for the user related Xsifeaturesrequireencryptionandthereforemustbeenteredthrough the phone s Options List Credentials menu FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLES xsi ip xsp xsi broadworks net or xsi ip johndoe mitel123 xsp xsi b...

Page 833: ...name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user name used for authentication of the Xsi account FORMAT username server DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE xsi user name xsi xsi broadworks net PARAMETER xsi personal contacts enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the BroadSoft Xsi Personal Contacts directo...

Page 834: ...ommon directory enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the BroadSoft Xsi Enterprise Common Directory should be enabled to be accessed on the phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi enterprise common directory enabled 1 PARAMETER xsi group directory enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg D...

Page 835: ...nal contacts name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folder name of the BroadSoft Xsi Personal Contacts when enabled FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Personal Contacts RANGE N A EXAMPLE xsi personal contacts name Xsi Personal PARAMETER xsi enterprise directory name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folde...

Page 836: ... PARAMETER xsi group directory name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the folder name of the BroadSoft Xsi Group Directory when enabled FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Group Directory RANGE N A EXAMPLE xsi group directory name Xsi Group PARAMETER xsi group common directory name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifie...

Page 837: ...onfigured time For example if the resync time parameter is set to 02 00 the event takes place any time between 02 00 and 02 15 When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish you must enter the time in the format 00h00 configuration files only FORMAT hh mm 00h00 for French and Spanish configuration files DEFAULT VALUE 02 30 RANGE hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 EXAMPLE xsi resync time 03 24 PAR...

Page 838: ...VALUE 30 RANGE 0 1439 EXAMPLE xsi resync max delay 20 PARAMETER ldap enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the LDAP Directory should be enabled to be accessed on the phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE ldap enabled 1 PARAMETER ldap name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifie...

Page 839: ...ORMAT String hostname or IP address DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap server ldap company com no authentication and using default port 389 ldap server user password ldap company com 3268 authentication and using port 3268 PARAMETER ldap user name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user s LDAP user name FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPL...

Page 840: ...to the configured time For example if the resync time parameter is set to 02 00 the event takes place any time between 02 00 and 02 15 When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish you must enter the time in the format 00h00 configuration files only FORMAT hh mm 00h00 for French and Spanish configuration files DEFAULT VALUE 02 00 RANGE hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 EXAMPLE ldap resync time ...

Page 841: ...name of a record are empty FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap cn attribute display PARAMETER ldap dn attribute CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to perform the search request for the detailed view of an LDAP contact FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap dn attribute customDN PARAMETER ldap search filter CONFIGURATION FILES start...

Page 842: ...AT String list base onelevel subtree DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE base onelevel subtree EXAMPLE ldap search scope onelevel PARAMETER ldap search timeout CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Used to set the request timeout for LDAP requests FORMAT Integer seconds DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 1 to 120 EXAMPLE ldap search timeout 30 PARAMETER ldap network timeout CONFIGURATION FILES st...

Page 843: ...AP directory uses ISO 8859 1 encoding EXAMPLE ldap use ISO 8859 1 encoding 1 PARAMETER ldap first name attribute list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP first name e g John for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by...

Page 844: ...ing list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap company attribute list organization bname PARAMETER ldap job title attribute list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP job title e g Vice President for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected i...

Page 845: ...cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business city e g Concord for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business city attribute list wcity bcity PARAMETER ldap business state attribute list CONFIGURATION ...

Page 846: ...cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business country e g Canada for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business country attribute list bcountry wcountry PARAMETER ldap home street attribute l...

Page 847: ...ESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP home state e g Texas for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap home state attribute list hstate pstate PARAMETER ldap home postal code attribute list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg...

Page 848: ... DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business phone 1 e g 1 905 760 4200 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business phone 1 attribute list wphone1 bphone1 PARAMETER ldap business phone 2 attribute list CONFIG...

Page 849: ... cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP home phone 2 e g 1 416 468 3267 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap home phone 2 attribute list hphone2 pphone2 PARAMETER ldap mobile phone attribute list CONFIGURATION ...

Page 850: ... cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP business fax e g 1 905 760 4233 for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap business fax attribute list fax bfax PARAMETER ldap email 1 attribute list CONFIGUR...

Page 851: ...g mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the LDAP email 3 e g j doe mitel com for the attribute list If this parameter contains more than one value only the first matching value will be selected in the record FORMAT String list of attribute names separated by a comma DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE ldap email 3 attribute list email3 mail3 PARAMETER directory disabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg mod...

Page 852: ...SCRIPTION Specifies the order in which the phone should sort directory contacts when displayed on screen FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 By First Name 1 By Last Name EXAMPLE directory sort preference 1 PARAMETER directory search dynamic threshold CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the threshold value where the contact search is no longer dynamic for ...

Page 853: ...ify a specific URI for accessing the Directory List after pressing the Directory List key When this parameter is set it overrides the standard function of the Directory List key FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE directory script http 10 50 100 234 test xml PARAMETER callers list disabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disab...

Page 854: ...cessing the Received Callers List after pressing the Received Callers List key When this parameter is set it overrides the standard function of the Received Callers List key FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE callers list script http 10 50 100 234 test xml PARAMETER call forward disabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disabl...

Page 855: ...counts on the phone custom The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts You can configure a specific mode All Busy and or No Answer for each account independently or all accounts On the 6863i and 6865i you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off On the 6867i 6869i and 6873i you can set all accounts to All On All Off or copy the configuration for the account...

Page 856: ...ILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows a pattern based configuration of the PIN suppression FORMAT Alphanumeric characters Symbol Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Digit symbol X Match any digit symbol wildcard Other keypad symbol can terminate a dial string Expression inclusive OR 0 or more of the preceding digit sym bol or expression Symbol inclusive OR Used only with represent a ra...

Page 857: ...nsmission of LLDP Data Unit LLDPDU packets The value of zero 0 disables this parameter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 30 RANGE 0 2147483647 EXAMPLE lldp interval 60 PARAMETER use lldp elin CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number ELIN received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers Additional func...

Page 858: ...o configure the time out interval This parameter is only valid during the phone bootup process FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 32 seconds RANGE 0 65535 seconds EXAMPLE lldp startinterval 7 PARAMETER lldp optional inventory management tlv CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Implements either all of the LLDP MED Inventory Management TLV sets or none of the sets FORMAT Integer ...

Page 859: ... to 1 the indicator is disabled and will NOT increment as unanswered calls come into the IP phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE missed calls indicator disabled 1 PARAMETER sip lineN missed calls enabled where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether missed calls on the defined line should increment the missed ...

Page 860: ...turns a response it blocks the phone until it is rebooted If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter the phone times out and will not be blocked FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 never timeout RANGE 0 to 2147483647 seconds EXAMPLE xml get timeout 20 PARAMETER xml application URI CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the XML application you are loading into ...

Page 861: ...plication title Traffic Reports PARAMETER xml application post list CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The HTTP server that is pushing XML applications to the IP phone FORMAT IP address in dotted decimal format and or Domain name address DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE xml application post list 10 50 10 53 dhcp10 53 ana mitel com PARAMETER xml beep notification CONFI...

Page 862: ...RMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 5 RANGE 1 to 25 EXAMPLE xml status scroll delay 3 PARAMETER action uri startup CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs This parameter can use any of the following variables DISPLAYNAME SIPUSERNAME SIPAUTHNAME PROXYURL LINESTATE LOCALIP REGISTRATIONSTATE REGISTRATIONC...

Page 863: ... auth name SIPAUTHNAME PARAMETER action uri registration event CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on when a registration event change occurs This parameter uses the following variables to determine the state of the event REGISTRATIONSTATE REGISTRATIONCODE Note If defined this action URI is also called upon at startup if the...

Page 864: ...LIP FORMAT Fully qualified URI DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Up to 128 ASCII characters EXAMPLE action uri incoming http 10 50 10 140 incoming php number REMOTENUMBER PARAMETER action uri outgoing CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call event occurs This parameter can use the following variables REMOTENUM...

Page 865: ...PLE action uri offhook http 10 50 10 140 offhook PARAMETER action uri onhook CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs This parameter can use the following variables LOCALIP CALLDURATION CALLDIRECTION LINESTATE Note The LocalIP CallDuration and CallDirection variables allow for enhanced informat...

Page 866: ...GISTRATIONSTATE REGISTRATIONCODE FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Any valid URI EXAMPLE action uri connected http fargo ana mitel com connected xml state LINESTATE PARAMETER action uri disconnected CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on when it transitions from the incoming outgoing calling or connected state into the i...

Page 867: ... SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist i e untrusted server the phone rejects the message FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip xml notify event 1 PARAMETER action uri xml sip notify CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone This parameter can use...

Page 868: ...i poll interval seconds FORMAT HTTP s server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE action uri poll http myserver com myappli xml PARAMETER action uri poll interval CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the interval in seconds between calls from the phone to the action uri poll FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE N A EXAM...

Page 869: ...s excluding silence or one of 8 custom ringtones FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Tone 1 RANGE Configuration Files 0 Tone 1 1 Tone 2 2 Tone 3 3 Tone 4 4 Tone 5 5 Silent 6 Tone 7 7 Tone 8 8 Tone 9 9 Tone 10 10 Tone 11 11 Tone 12 12 Tone 13 13 Tone 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring Tone 3 103 Custom Ring Tone 4 104 Custom Ring Tone 5 105 Custom Ring ...

Page 870: ...FIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Globally sets a tone set for a specific country FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE US RANGE Australia Brazil Canada Europe generic tones France Germany Italy Italy2 Malaysia Mexico Russia Slovakia United Kingdom UK US EXAMPLE tone set Germany ...

Page 871: ...e of 15 pre defined rings excluding silence or one of 8 custom ringtones FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Global RANGE 1 Global 0 Tone 1 1 Tone 2 2 Tone 3 3 Tone 4 4 Tone 5 5 Silent 6 Tone 7 7 Tone 8 8 Tone 9 9 Tone 10 10 Tone 11 11 Tone 12 12 Tone 13 13 Tone 14 14 Tone 15 15 Tone 6 100 Custom Ring Tone 1 101 Custom Ring Tone 2 102 Custom Ring Tone 3 103 Custom Ring Tone 4 104 Custom Ring Tone 5 106...

Page 872: ...path filename wav HTTP http server port path filename wav HTTPS https server port path filename wav DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE custom ringtone 1 beep wav PARAMETER ringtone webui lock CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies if the Custom Ringtones menu for ringtone installation should be available in both User and Administrator Web UIs available in the Admi...

Page 873: ...n utilizing the headset audio mode With this feature enabled and when the phone s speaker is playing the incoming call s ring tone call waiting tones will not be played FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 1 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE ring audibly enable 1 PARAMETER no service congestion tone CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION If enabled the congestion tone ...

Page 874: ...ONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the UI focus is switched to a ringing line while the phone is in the connected state FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 enable RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE switch focus to ringing line 1 PARAMETER call hold reminder CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the reminder rin...

Page 875: ...nable EXAMPLE call hold reminder during active calls 1 PARAMETER call hold reminder timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the time delay in seconds that a ring splash is heard on an active call when another call was placed on hold For example if a call comes into Line 1 and then a call comes into Line 2 and you answer Line 2 Line 1 is automatically placed on...

Page 876: ...etermined by the call hold reminder timer parameter and then the ring splash is heard again after 60 seconds determined by this parameter Notes You must enable the call hold reminder and or call hold reminder during active calls parameter s and the call hold reminder timer parameter for this parameter to work A value of 0 prevents additional rings FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 60 RANGE 0 4294967295...

Page 877: ...le this parameter 1 enable the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call When you disable this parameter 0 disable the Goodbye key hangs up the active call For the 6867i 6869i and 6873i If you enable this parameter and the phone receives another call when an active call is already present the phone displays answer and ignore You can press the required softkey as applicable For the 6863i and 6865i If y...

Page 878: ... 3 the LED illuminates if a voicemail is pending on line 3 If you set this parameter to 0 the LED illuminates if a voicemail is pending on any line on the phone Note To enable MWI for all lines in the configuration files set this parameter to zero 0 The enable MWI for all lines in the Mitel Web UI select All in the Message Waiting Indicator Line field FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 all lines RANGE...

Page 879: ...rb DND account Sets DND for a specific account DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI to ON or OFF phone Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF custom Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key that list the account s on the phone The user can select a specific account for DND turn DND ON for all ac...

Page 880: ... alerting enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming calls and call waiting calls FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 true RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE priority alerting enabled 0 PARAMETER alert auto call distribution CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert acd keyword a...

Page 881: ...GE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert community 1 3 PARAMETER alert community 2 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert community 2 keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Normal ringing ...

Page 882: ...inging RANGE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert community 3 1 PARAMETER alert community 4 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert community 4 keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Norma...

Page 883: ...ANGE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert external 4 PARAMETER alert emergency CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert emergency keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Normal ringing RANGE...

Page 884: ... ringing RANGE 0 Normal ringing default 1 Bellcore dr2 2 Bellcore dr3 3 Bellcore dr4 4 Bellcore dr5 5 Silent EXAMPLE alert group 4 PARAMETER alert internal CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When an alert internal keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Normal ringing ...

Page 885: ...alert priority 4 PARAMETER bellcore cadence dr2 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Sets the cadence for Bellcore dr2 Note You can define up to 8 cadence rings The value of 1 indicates do not repeat FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 800 400 800 4000 RANGE N A EXAMPLE bellcore cadence dr2 800 400 800 4000 PARAMETER bellcore cadence dr3 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg ...

Page 886: ...e of 1 indicates do not repeat FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 RANGE N A EXAMPLE bellcore cadence dr4 300 200 1000 200 300 300 200 4000 PARAMETER bellcore cadence dr5 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Sets the cadence for Bellcore dr5 Note You can define up to 8 cadence rings The value of 1 indicates do not repeat FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 500 ...

Page 887: ...etting a value for this parameter FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip diversion display 0 PARAMETER sip lineN diversion display where N line number CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION If enabled when an outgoing call is being diverted to another destination the phone displays the Caller ID of the new destination and the reason for the cal...

Page 888: ...on name 1 PARAMETER directory lookup suppression pattern CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows a pattern based configuration whereby if the configured pattern is found in the From header display name of an incoming call the phone bypasses the local directory lookup and shows the display name as intended by the call manager i e as specified in the From header Patterns...

Page 889: ...loading language packs see Loading Language Packs on page 5 51 FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 to 4 all phones EXAMPLE language 1 PARAMETER web language CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The language you want to display for the Mitel Web UI Valid values for all phones are 0 English default 1 4 The values 1 4 are dependent on the Language N parameter For example i...

Page 890: ...a language value for this parameter allows users to enter text and characters in the IP Phone UI Mitel Web UI and in XML applications via the keypad on the phone in the language s specified FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE English RANGE Valid values are English French Français German Deutsch Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only ελληνικά Italian Italiano Spanish Español Portuguese Português Russian Русский No...

Page 891: ...ang_da txt Danish lang_el txt Greek 6867i 6869i and 6873i only lang_es txt Spanish lang_es_mx txt Mexican Spanish lang_eu txt Euskera lang_fi txt Finnish lang_fr txt French lang_fr_ca txt Canadian French lang_gl txt Galego lang_hu txt Hungarian lang_it txt Italian lang_nl txt Dutch lang_nl_nl txt Dutch Netherlands lang_no txt Norwegian lang_pl txt Polish ASCII lang_pl_pl txt Polish UTF 8 lang_pt t...

Page 892: ...end of the string For example language 1 ftp admin admin 1 2 3 4 50 path lang_de txt where path is the directory and lang_de txt is the filename If you do not specify a filename the download fails See examples for each below FORMAT lang_ ISO 639 _ ISO 3166 txt or lang_ ISO 639 txt Note For valid values for ISO 639 and ISO 3166 see Language Codes from Standard ISO 639 on page A 195 and Country Code...

Page 893: ... English en Czech UTF 8 cs Czech ASCII cs_op Catalan ct Valencian ct_va Welsh cy German de Danish da Greek el Spanish es Mexican Spanish es_mx Euskera eu Finnish fi French fr Canadian French fr_ca Galego gl Hungarian hu Italian it Dutch nl Dutch Netherlands nl_nl Norwegian no Polish ASCII pl Polish UTF 8 pl_pl Portuguese pt Portuguese Brazilian pt_br Romanian ro Russian ru Slovak UTF 8 sk Slovak A...

Page 894: ...NTARCTICA ANTIGUA AND BARBUDA ARGENTINA ARMENIA ARUBA AUSTRALIA AUSTRIA AZERBAIJAN AF AX AL DZ AS AD AO AI AQ AG AR AM AW AU AT AZ BAHAMAS BAHRAIN BANGLADESH BARBADOS BELARUS BELGIUM BELIZE BENIN BERMUDA BHUTAN BOLIVIA BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA BOTSWANA BOUVET ISLAND BRAZIL BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY BRUNEI DARUSSALAM BULGARIA BURKINA FASO BURUNDI BS BH BD BB BY BE BZ BJ BM BT BO BA BW BV BR IO B...

Page 895: ...A CUBA CYPRUS CZECH REPUBLIC KH CM CA CV KY CF TD CL CN CX CC CO KM CG CD CK CR CI HR CU CY CZ DENMARK Dhcp see Chapter 4 the section DHCP Time Offset Option 2 Support on page 5 22 DJIBOUTI DOMINICA DOMINICAN REPUBLIC DK DP DJ DM DO ECUADOR EGYPT EL SALVADOR EQUATORIAL GUINEA ERITREA ESTONIA ETHIOPIA EC EG SV GQ ER EE ET FALKLAND ISLANDS MALVINAS FAROE ISLANDS FIJI FINLAND FRANCE FRENCH GUIANA FRE...

Page 896: ...GP GU GT GG GN GW GY HAITI HEARD ISLAND AND MCDONALD ISLANDS HOLY SEE VATICAN CITY STATE HONDURAS HONG KONG HUNGARY HT HM VA HN HK HU ICELAND INDIA INDONESIA IRAN ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF IRAQ IRELAND ISLE OF MAN ISRAEL ITALY IS IN ID IR IQ IE IM IL IT JAMAICA JAPAN JERSEY JORDAN JM JP JE JO KAZAKHSTAN KENYA KIRIBATI KOREA DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE S REPUBLIC OF KOREA REPUBLIC OF KUWAIT KYRGYZSTAN KZ KE KI KP ...

Page 897: ...S LR LY LI LT LU MACAO MACEDONIA THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF MADAGASCAR MALAWI MALAYSIA MALDIVES MALI MALTA MARSHALL ISLANDS MARTINIQUE MAURITANIA MAURITIUS MAYOTTE MEXICO MICRONESIA FEDERATED STATES OF MOLDOVA REPUBLIC OF MONACO MONGOLIA MONTENEGRO MONTSERRAT MOROCCO MOZAMBIQUE MYANMAR MO MK MG MW MY MV ML MT MH MQ MR MU YT MX FM MD MC MN ME MS MA MZ MM COUNTRY COUNTRY CODE ...

Page 898: ... NIGERIA NIUE NORFOLK ISLAND NORTHERN MARIANA ISLANDS NORWAY NA NR NP NL AN NC NZ NI NE NG NU NF MP NO OMAN OM PAKISTAN PALAU PALESTINIAN TERRITORY OCCUPIED PANAMA PAPUA NEW GUINEA PARAGUAY PERU PHILIPPINES PITCAIRN POLAND PORTUGAL PUERTO RICO PK PW PS PA PG PY PE PH PN PL PT PR QATAR QA RÉUNION ROMANIA RUSSIAN FEDERATION RWANDA RE RO RU RW COUNTRY COUNTRY CODE ...

Page 899: ...A SOUTH AFRICA SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS SPAIN SRI LANKA SUDAN SURINAME SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN SWAZILAND SWEDEN SWITZERLAND SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC SH KN LC PM VC WS SM ST SA SN RS SC SL SG SK SI SB SO ZA GS ES LK SD SR SJ SZ SE CH SY TAIWAN PROVINCE OF CHINA TAJIKISTAN TANZANIA UNITED REPUBLIC OF THAILAND TIMOR LESTE TOGO TOKELAU TONGA TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO TUNISIA TURKEY TURKMENIST...

Page 900: ... UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS URUGUAY UZBEKISTAN UG TA AE GB US TM UY UZ VANUATU Vatican City State VENEZUELA VIET NAM VIRGIN ISLANDS BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS U S VU see HOLY SEE VE VN VG VI WALLIS AND FUTUNA WESTERN SAHARA WF EH YEMEN YE Zaire ZAMBIA ZIMBABWE see CONGO THE DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC OF THE ZM ZW COUNTRY COUNTRY CODE ...

Page 901: ...olean DEFAULT VALUE 1 enabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE suppress dtmf playback 0 PARAMETER display dtmf digits CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits when dialing on the IP phone DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when you press the phone s touch keys This is also known as touchtone...

Page 902: ... FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 3 Off RANGE 1 Phone Side 2 Server Side 3 Off EXAMPLE sip intercom type 1 PARAMETER sip intercom prefix code CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The prefix to add to the ...

Page 903: ...ETER sip allow auto answer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an Intercom call If auto answer is enabled on the IP phone the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call If auto answer is disabled the phone treats the incoming intercom call as a normal call FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT...

Page 904: ...e is on an active call as well as how the phone handles multicast paging calls while the phone is in a dialing state When you enable this parameter an incoming intercom call takes precedence over any active call by placing the active call on hold and automatically answering the intercom call Also when enabled for multicast pages during a dialing state the phone will automatically switch focus to t...

Page 905: ...th several codecs defined in the media stream with an SDP Answer containing all the codecs present in the Offer as per RFC 3264 or with an SDP Answer containing just one preferred codec as per 3GPP TS 24 229 FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled RFC 3264 1 Enabled 3GPP TS 24 229 EXAMPLE sip single codec reply in sdp 1 PARAMETER paging group listening CONFIGURATION FILES star...

Page 906: ...g if you want to make or receive all calls using a handset or headset For the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i calls can be switched from the handset to headset by pressing the handsfree button on the phone To switch from the headset to the handset lift the handset 2 Speaker Headset Incoming calls are sent to the handsfree speakerphone first when the handsfree button is pressed By pressing the handsfre...

Page 907: ...cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the minimum ringer volume level FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 9 EXAMPLE ringer volume minimum 1 PARAMETER far end disconnect timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the phone displays an indication of a terminated call If set to 0 this feature is disabled and the phone does not display the Call Terminat...

Page 908: ...nging BLF will not pick up the call immediately but will instead display the remote caller s information first allowing the user to review who is calling When using the MiCloud Telepo platform the parameter must be defined as 3 In this mode pressing a BLF key when the monitored extension is ringing will cause the phone use the dialog information sent in the NOTIFY message to form the INVITE reques...

Page 909: ...LF List softkey the phone prepends the 98 value to the designated extension of the BLF or BLF List softkey when dialing out Notes The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over BLF if the server provides applicable information If the Directed Call Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server the Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value ...

Page 910: ...acd auto available 1 PARAMETER acd auto available timer CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the length of time in seconds before the IP phone status switches back to available FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 60 seconds RANGE 0 to 120 seconds EXAMPLE acd auto available timer 60 PARAMETER redial disabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION E...

Page 911: ...N FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the Xfer key on the IP phone If this parameter is set to 0 the key is active and can be pressed by the user If this parameter is set to 1 pressing the Xfer key is ignored FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE call transfer disabled 1 PARAMETER map redial key to CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cf...

Page 912: ...ap conf key to 5551267 PARAMETER map redial as dtmf CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows the phone to send the stored number as DTMF using the phone configured DTMF method when the Redial key is pressed FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE map redial as dtmf 1 PARAMETER map conf as dtmf CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac c...

Page 913: ...Asterisk 70 70 asterisk Sylantro 98 99 sylantro BroadWorks 68 88 broadworks ININ PBX callpark pickup inin Leave value fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature For BroadSoft BroadWorks the following syntax is applicable park_code park_dial_code pickup_code pickup_dial_code broadworks Note Pauses can be introduced in the park and pick up dial codes by adding commas Each comma amounts to a...

Page 914: ... pickup feature FORMAT Alphanumeric characters DEFAULT VALUE Blank RANGE See applicable values in table above EXAMPLE sprecode 68 PARAMETER pickupsprecode CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you want to pickup a parked call The applicable value is dependent on the type of server in the network Server Pick...

Page 915: ...ule consists of 3 pages of 28 softkeys for a total of 84 You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totalling 252 softkeys Valid for 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i phones Note 9 keypad keys are available to be configured as press and hold speeddials on all IP phone models IP PHONE MODEL SOFTKEYS EXPANSION MODULE KEYS PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LINES AVAILABLE 6863i N A 3 2 6865i 16 to 48 Model M680...

Page 916: ...old and then press the Speeddial key dnd Indicates key is configured for do not disturb on the phone This option is Do Not Disturb in the Mitel Web UI You must also set the DND key mode see DND Key Mode on page 5 94 and DND Key Mode Settings on page A 181 for details xml Indicates the key is configured to accept an XML application for accessing customized XML services You can also specify an XML k...

Page 917: ...m Indicates the key is configured to be used as the Intercom key phonelock Indicates the key is configured to be used to lock unlock the phone paging Indicates the key is configured for Group Paging on the phone Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol RTP stream to pre configured multicast address es without involving SIP signaling hotdesklogin Indicates the key is con...

Page 918: ...in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward speeddialxfer speeddialconf directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom phonelock paging hotdesklogin discreetringing empty EXAMPLE softkey1 type directory softkey2 type speeddial softkey3 type lcr softkey4 type xml ...

Page 919: ...r can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial xml flash spre park pickup speeddialxfer speeddialconf directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom paging hotdesklogin Note If the softkeyN type parameter is set to flash and no label value is entered for the softkeyN label parameter the label of Flash is used FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Varies EXAMPLE softkey1 label jane softk...

Page 920: ...ialconf redial filter icom paging For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For spre the value is dependent on services offered by server For park and pickup valid values see Chapter 5 the section Park Pickup Call Server Configuration Values on page 5 220 For xml you can specify a URI to us...

Page 921: ...ER softkeyN line CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model The softkeyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial list lcr speeddialxfer speeddialconf redial filter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 RAN...

Page 922: ...type of empty does not display on the idle screen at all FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE For softkey type none flash phonelock paging All states disabled For softkey types dnd speeddial xml lcr callforward speeddialxfer speeddialconf directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom empty idle connected incoming outgoing busy For softkey type flash All states disabled For softkey type park spre connected F...

Page 923: ...to both top and bottom softkeys FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Enabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE collapsed softkey screen 0 PARAMETER collapsed softkey screen offset top CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Defines the offset for locking or collapsing the top softkeys If the collapsed softkey screen parameter is enabled the phone will lock the respective top s...

Page 924: ...he phone will collapse the respective bottom softkeys from bottom softkey 1 to the value defined and lock the rest of the bottom softkeys FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 1 17 6867i 1 23 6869i 6873i EXAMPLES collapsed softkey screen offset bottom 2 Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phone only PARAMETER collapsed context user softkey screen CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cf...

Page 925: ...one By default when a total of six top softkeys and four bottom softkeys are configured for the 6867i IP phone the screen displays five top softkeys four bottom softkeys and More options to access the remaining softkeys When this parameter is enabled the More softkeys are removed allowing the phones to display all configured top and bottom softkeys on one screen The same behavior is applied to the...

Page 926: ...ts through the active voice path To dial out you have to first put the active call on hold and then press the Speeddial key dnd Indicates key is configured for do not disturb on the phone This option is Do Not Disturb in the Mitel Web UI You must also set the DND key mode see DND Key Mode on page 5 94 and DND Key Mode Settings on page A 181 for details blf Indicates key is configured for Busy Lamp...

Page 927: ...ed to be used as a Speeddial key for a voicemail account directory Indicates the key is configured to access the Directory List filter Indicates the key is configured to activate deactivate Executive Call Filtering callers Indicates the key is configured to access the Received Callers List redial Indicates the key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List conf Indicates the key is configure...

Page 928: ...ist BLF List in the Mitel Web UI acd Auto Call Distribution in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging hotdesklogin empty discreetringing EXAMPLE prgkey3 type speeddial ...

Page 929: ...e keypad on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter icom paging Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For spre the value is dependent on services offered by server For park...

Page 930: ...prgkey4 value 123456 example of a speeddial prefix PARAMETER prgkeyN line CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the line associated with the programmable key you are configuring The prgkeyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial blf list acd lcr blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VA...

Page 931: ... Mode Settings on page A 181 for details blf Indicates key is configured for Busy Lamp Field BLF use User can dial out on a BLF configured key You can configure a maximum of 50 BLFs shared between the phone and any attached expansion modules list Indicates key is configured for BLF List use This option is BLF List in the Mitel Web UI User can dial out on a BLF List configured key You can also use ...

Page 932: ... Filtering callers Indicates the key is configured to access the Received Callers List redial Indicates the key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List conf Indicates the key is configured as a Conference key xfer Indicates the key is configured as a Transfer key for transferring calls icom Indicates the key is configured to be used as the Intercom key services Indicates the key is config...

Page 933: ...ll Distribution in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre callforward park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi lcr directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging hotdesklogin discreetringing empty EXAMPLE topsoftkey1 type line topsoftkey2 type speeddial topsoftkey3 type lcr topsoftkey4 type xml ...

Page 934: ...lowing softkey types only line speeddial blf acd xml flash spre park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom services paging hotdesklogin Note If the topsoftkeyN type parameter is set to flash and no label value is entered for the topsoftkeyN label parameter the label of Flash is used FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Varies EXAMPLE ...

Page 935: ...d on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial paging icom filter Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For spre the value is dependent on services offered by server For park and pi...

Page 936: ...ME topsoftkey5 value 12345 example of a speeddial prefix PARAMETER topsoftkeyN line CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model The topsoftkeyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial blf list acd lc...

Page 937: ...mber that is dialed out when you press and hold the corresponding keypad key FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE pnhkeypad7 value 5557605123 PARAMETER pnhkeypadN line where N corresponds to the keypad keys 1 9 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The line associated with the press and hold speeddial number configured on the keypad key FORMAT Integer DEFAULT ...

Page 938: ...re a maximum of 50 BLFs shared between the phone and any attached expansion modules list Indicates key is configured for BLF List use This option is BLF List in the Mitel Web UI User can dial out on a BLF List configured key You can also use the BLF List URI parameter to specify a URI for the phone to access for the BLF List acd for Sylantro BroadWorks servers only Indicates the key is configured ...

Page 939: ...rs Indicates the key is configured to access the Received Callers List redial Indicates the key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List conf Indicates the key is configured as a Conference key xfer Indicates the key is configured as a Transfer key for transferring calls icom Indicates the key is configured to be used as the Intercom key services Indicates the key is set to be used as the ...

Page 940: ...ution in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging hotdesklogin discreetringing empty Example expmod1 key1 type line expmod1 key2 type speeddial expmod1 key3 type blf expmod1 key4 type list ...

Page 941: ...for the following softkey types only line speeddial blf acd xml flash spre park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers redial conf xfer icom services paging hotdesklogin Note If the expmodXkeyN type parameter is set to flash and no label value is entered for the expmodXkeyN label parameter the label of Flash is used FORMAT Text DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE Vari...

Page 942: ...from the keypad on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter icom paging Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the softkey For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For spre the value is dependent on services offered by server F...

Page 943: ...of a speeddial prefix PARAMETER expmodX keyN line CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring on the Expansion Module The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model The expmodX keyN line parameter can be set for the following softkey types only speeddial blf list acd lcr blfxfer...

Page 944: ...configured for Auto Call Distribution called Auto Call Distribution in the Mitel Web UI The ACD feature allows the Sylantro BroadWorks server to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users agents xml Indicates the key is configured to accept an XML application for accessing customized XML services You can also specify an XML softkey URL for this option flash Indicates the key is set...

Page 945: ... key is configured to access the Received Callers List redial Indicates key is configured to access the Outgoing Redial List conf Indicates the key is configured as a Conference key xfer Indicates the key is configured as a Transfer key for transferring calls icom Indicates the key is set to be used as the Intercom key phonelock Indicates the key is set to be used to lock unlock the phone paging I...

Page 946: ... the Mitel Web UI acd Auto call distribution in the Mitel Web UI xml flash spre park pickup lcr callforward blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi directory filter callers Callers List in Mitel Web UI redial conf xfer icom services phonelock paging hotdesklogin discreetringing EXAMPLE hardkey1 type speeddial ...

Page 947: ... you then enter the rest of the number from the keypad on the phone line blf spre xml park pickup blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter paging Notes For speeddial the value is the phone number extension or prefix number to enter for the key For line the value is optional for example L4 For blf the value is the extension you want to monitor For spre the value is dependent o...

Page 948: ...p cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The line associated with the hard key you are configuring The hardkeyN line parameter can be set for the following key types only speeddial blf list acd lcr blfxfer speeddialxfer speeddialconf speeddialmwi redial filter FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N where N line number RANGE 1 2 6863i 1 24 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i EXAMPLE hardkey1 line 9 ...

Page 949: ...y to the phone s environment are ignored The SAVE and DELETE keys appear by default as Keys 5 and 6 on the 6865i unless specifically changed by your Administrator An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the key types in the configuration files Any key type already configured on a phone displays in that key s Type list in addition to the values specified for this parameter Afte...

Page 950: ...with the additional softkeyN parameters i e softkeyN label softkeyN value softkeyN line softkeyN states FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disable RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE softkey1 locked 1 PARAMETER topsoftkeyN locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Locks the specified top softkey on the 6867i 6869i or 6873i IP phone When enabled the phone locks the key with the ...

Page 951: ...value prgkeyN line FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disable RANGE 0 disable 1 enable EXAMPLE prgkey1 locked 1 PARAMETER expmodX keyN locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Locks the specified softkey on the Expansion Module attached to the IP phone When enabled the phone locks the key with the provisioned local settings and prevents users from changing or configuring th...

Page 952: ...eters i e pnhkeypadN value and pnhkeypadN line FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE pnhkeypad1 locked 1 PARAMETER hardkeyN locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Locks the specified hard key on the IP phones When enabled the phone locks the key with the provisioned local settings and prevents users from changing or configuring the...

Page 953: ...ion from the Save key to another function removes the ability to save items on the IP phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 lock RANGE 0 unlock 1 lock EXAMPLE prgkey5 locked 0 PARAMETER prgkey6 locked CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to lock or unlock the Delete key on the 6865i IP Phone When the Delete key is unlocked a User can change the function of the ke...

Page 954: ...e SAVE TO key If this parameter is set to disabled No it blocks the user from using any of the features on the phone to create or edit a Speeddial key FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 Enabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE speeddial edit 0 Note Applicable to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER list uri CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies t...

Page 955: ...ing or hold slow flashing state 3 switch page if monitored extension transitions to either ringing or hold state OR from idle off state to in call solid state EXAMPLE blf activity page switch 1 Note Applicable to the 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER blf display label to max CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies how the phone should display BLF and BL...

Page 956: ...ing this parameter FORMAT Any character placed within quotation marks DEFAULT VALUE RANGE Any character can be left empty as well EXAMPLE keys noname symbol e PARAMETER keys noname hidden CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION If this parameter is set to 0 disabled then a series of question marks or the symbol configured as defined by the keys noname symbol parameter will be...

Page 957: ...LF List number using the next available line FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 1 0 DTMF in active call 1 Active call placed on hold and BLF or BLF List number dialed out using the next available line EXAMPLE blf key mode 1 Note Applicable to the 6865i 6867i 6869i and 6873i IP Phones only PARAMETER play a ring splash CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disa...

Page 958: ...define the delay 5 Low volume same as the current BLF ring splash but at a lower level to be less intrusive 6 Low volume delayed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is ...

Page 959: ...ed if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play...

Page 960: ... define the delay 5 Low volume same as the current BLF ring splash but at a lower level to be less intrusive 6 Low volume delayed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is...

Page 961: ...yed if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If pla...

Page 962: ...o define the delay 5 Low volume same as the current BLF ring splash but at a lower level to be less intrusive 6 Low volume delayed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash i...

Page 963: ... if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play a...

Page 964: ...ine the delay 5 Low volume same as the current BLF ring splash but at a lower level to be less intrusive 6 Low volume delayed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is def...

Page 965: ... if a custom ring tone is selected FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If play a...

Page 966: ...lay parameter to define the delay 5 Low volume same as the current BLF ring splash but at a lower level to be less intrusive 6 Low volume delayed after a delay of x seconds the ring signal that is the same as the current BLF ring splash is played at a lower level use the ring splash delay parameter to define the delay 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play ...

Page 967: ...layed if a custom ring tone is selected DEFAULT VALUE Integer RANGE N A EXAMPLE 0 Silence 1 Normal 2 Normal delayed 3 Periodic 4 Periodic delayed 5 Low volume 6 Low volume delayed 7 The behavior is determined by the global parameter play a ring splash If play a ring splash is defined as 0 then the feature is disabled If play a ring splash is defined as 1 then the behavior is the same as Normal If ...

Page 968: ... splash volume CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Indicates the volume of the ring splash from 1 loudest to 9 softest when the keyN ring splash parameter is set to a low volume alerting pattern FORMAT Numeric DEFAULT VALUE 5 RANGE 1 9 EXAMPLE ring splash volume 2 PARAMETER ring splash frequency CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Indicates the f...

Page 969: ...fg DESCRIPTION Specifies whether or not the discreet ringing feature should be enabled When enabled during incoming calls all applicable visual indicators LED for the corresponding Line key Message Waiting Indicator MWI etc will behave normally but the ring tone will be played only once FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE discreet ringing 1 ...

Page 970: ...e 1 expmod1page1left Expansion Module 1 Page 1 left column expmod1page2left Expansion Module 1 Page 2 left column expmod1page3left Expansion Module 1 Page 3 left column Expansion Module 2 expmod2page1left Expansion Module 2 Page 1 left column expmod2page2left Expansion Module 2 Page 2 left column expmod2page3left Expansion Module 2 Page 3 left column Expansion Module 3 expmod3page1left Expansion M...

Page 971: ...olumn expmod1page2right Expansion Module 1 Page 2 right column expmod1page3right Expansion Module 1 Page 3 right column Expansion Module 2 expmod2page1right Expansion Module 2 Page 1 right column expmod2page2right Expansion Module 2 Page 2 right column expmod2page3right Expansion Module 2 Page 3 right column Expansion Module 3 expmod3page1right Expansion Module 3 Page 1 right column expmod3page2ri...

Page 972: ...cfg DESCRIPTION Forces the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software prior to release 1 4 This method sends the CANCEL message after the REFER message when blind transferring a call FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip cancel after blind transfer 1 PARAMETER sip refer to with replaces CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DES...

Page 973: ...he user name or if there is no contact header found or the contact header has no user name put the remote address of the original INVITE to the Refer To header FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sip refer to with replaces 1 PARAMETER sip update callerid CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the updating of the Call...

Page 974: ...overy If this parameter is set to 0 press 1 and keys during boot up when the logo displays to force the web recovery mode FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 false RANGE 0 false 1 true EXAMPLE force web recovery mode disabled 1 PARAMETER max boot count CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the number of faulty boots that occur before the phone is forced into Web recove...

Page 975: ...CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION This parameter enables disables the whitelist proxy feature as follows Set to 0 to disable the feature Set to 1 to enable the feature When this feature is enabled an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disable...

Page 976: ...g model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies an Conf script for the phone to use When this parameter is set pressing the Conf key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in performing the conference action FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE empty RANGE Any valid URI EXAMPLE conf script http bluevelvet ana mitel com conf php PARAMETER icom script CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRI...

Page 977: ... model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies an Options script for the phone to use When this parameter is set pressing the Options Key GETs the specified URI from the server Note PressingandholdingtheOptionskeydisplaysthelocalOptions Menu on the phone FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE empty RANGE Any valid URI EXAMPLE options script http fargo ana mitel com options xml PARAMETER auto offhook CONFIGURATION ...

Page 978: ... allowed 2 Phone allows XML POSTs to the phone as well as XML GETs to from the phone by pressing the XML keys softkeys programmable keys extension module keys FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 to 2 EXAMPLE xml lock override 1 PARAMETER sip symmetric udp signaling CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060 to send SI...

Page 979: ...nabled RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE sips symmetric tls signaling 0 PARAMETER sip user agent CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User Agent and Server SIP headers in the SIP stack The value of 0 prevents the UserAgent and Server SIP header from being added to the SIP stack The value of 1 allows these headers to be a...

Page 980: ...one is test mitel com then If the NAPTR record is returned empty the phone will use the default value _sip _udp test mitel com for the SRV lookup If the NAPTR record is returned test mitel com SIP D2U _sip _udp abc mitel com the phone will use _sip _udp abc mitel com for the SRV lookup If the NAPTR record is returned test mitel com SIP D2T _sip _tcp test mitel com where the service type TCP mismat...

Page 981: ...quests 1 PARAMETER sip notify opt headers CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables whether or not the Allow and Allow Events optional headers are included in the SIP NOTIFY messages sent from the phone to the server FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 1 RANGE 0 disabled optional headers are removed from the SIP NOTIFY message 1 enabled no change optional headers ...

Page 982: ...e packet 1 enable removes the Route header from the packet EXAMPLE sip remove route 1 PARAMETER sip compact headers CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables the IP phones to use compact SIP headers in the SIP packets sent from the phone FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 disabled uses long SIP header format RANGE 0 disabled uses long SIP header format 1 enabled...

Page 983: ...ration server The phone s download this file to perform DNS lookups on the local network instead of the service provider s public network Note If using a text file on a PC to enter this value you must enter a carriage return CR after entering the host file name FORMAT UNIX format using Carriage Return CR or Carriage Return Line Feed CRLF to terminate each line DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE File name all...

Page 984: ...TION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION The weight level assigned to this server If a service has multiple SRV records with the same priority value the phones use the weight field to determine which host to use The weight value is relevant only in relation to other weight values for the service and only among records with the same priority value Note The sip dns srvX weight parameter ...

Page 985: ...m PARAMETER sip dns cache negative max ttl CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the DNS maximum cache TTL for negative responses FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 5 minutes RANGE 0 2147483647 seconds 0 Disabled EXAMPLE sip dns cache negative max ttl 3600 PARAMETER sip dns cache positive max ttl CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies ...

Page 986: ... default this parameter is set to 1 invalid whereby SIP services use the same transport protocol as defined in the sip transport protocol parameter FORMAT Numeric DEFAULT VALUE 1 Invalid RANGE 1 Invalid 0 TCP UDP 1 UDP 2 TCP EXAMPLE sip services transport protocol 1 PARAMETER sip services port CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the port used for SIP services FO...

Page 987: ...summary reports transport protocol 2 Note Applicable to the 6863i and 6865i IP Phones only PARAMETER username alphanumeric input order CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION When enabled this parameter changes the default behavior of the keypad input order during username prompts from uppercase letters digit lowercase letters to digit uppercase letters lowercase letters For ...

Page 988: ...AMETER recorder addressN N is a number from 1 to 6 CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies a trusted IP address maximum of six corresponding to the voice recording system The IP phone will check and respond to SIP messages coming from these IP addresses on the port defined by the sip services port parameter Note If all of the recorder addressN parameters are left un...

Page 989: ... left undefined no authentication checks will be performed FORMAT IP Address DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE recording destination1 192 168 1 30 recording destination2 192 168 1 31 recording destination3 192 168 1 32 recording destination4 192 168 1 33 recording destination5 192 168 1 34 recording destination6 192 168 1 35 PARAMETER recording periodic beep CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg mac c...

Page 990: ...rs that their call is being recorded should be played FORMAT Integer DEFAULT VALUE 1 Network RANGE 0 2 0 Local 1 Network 2 Both Local and Network EXAMPLE recording beep direction 2 PARAMETER xsi user name CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the user name used for authentication of the Xsi account FORMAT username server DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE xsi use...

Page 991: ... not applicable to user related Xsi features such as Speed Dial 8 Call Logs and Personal Directory Contacts Credentials for the user related Xsi features require encryption and therefore must be entered through the phone s Options List Credentials menu FORMAT String DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLES xsi ip xsp xsi broadworks net or xsi ip johndoe mitel123 xsp xsi broadworks net PARAMETER xsi pr...

Page 992: ...ON Enables or disables Xsi Speed Dial 8 functionality FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi speeddial8 enabled 1 PARAMETER xsi calllogs enabled CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables or disables Xsi Call Log functionality FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 Disabled RANGE 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EXAMPLE xsi calllogs enabled 1 PARAMETE...

Page 993: ...y name of the FROM header or PAI header will be stripped before it is displayed on the phone s screen For example if the From header sent by the BroadWorks call manager SIP INVITE message is From F Filtrage Dupont Francois sip 5551234567 as aastra com user phone then the IP phone displays the calling name as Filtrage Dupont Francois since the F prefix is removed FORMAT String in quotations DEFAULT...

Page 994: ...artup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the configuration server URL where the user cfg is located when utilizing the Visitor Desk Phone VDP feature FORMAT String up to 256 characters FTP ftp server port path TFTP tftp server port path HTTP http server port path HTTPS https server port path DEFAULT VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE user config url http 100 200 50 79 vdp PARAMETER hot desk high...

Page 995: ...onfig upload parameter this parameter is utilized to help distribute the file transfers to the config ration server in a more even manner i e so that the server does not get bombarded by file transfer requests all at the same time After the initial save the user _local cfg is saved at a random time period between the values defined in the user config upload parameter and this user config upload de...

Page 996: ...or not 2 Only if the user _local cfg has changed Checked when the user config upload time period expires and at logout EXAMPLE user config upload control 2 PARAMETER sip moh server CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Global parameter Specifies the media server SIP address providing the audio stream for music on hold functionality If defined the phone will use the specifie...

Page 997: ...lity If defined the phone will use the specified server to provide an audio stream to any held parties on the specific line The audio stream will be offered in all cases when a remote party is placed on hold i e when placed on hold directly when placed on hold while performing a transfer or conference or when the local party switches lines FORMAT String SIP address excluding the domain name DEFAUL...

Page 998: ...g all the debug levels on the phone may impact performance and normal operation of the phone PARAMETER log server ip CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Specifies the IP address of the log server to which log information will be transmitted FORMAT IP address DEFAULT VALUE 0 0 0 0 RANGE N A EXAMPLE log server ip 192 168 3 2 PARAMETER log server port CONFIGURATION FILES sta...

Page 999: ...The IP Phone blogs are separated into modules which allow you to log specific information for analyzing Module Name configuration files linemgr line manager information user interface misc miscellaneous sip call control SIP stack dis display driver dstore delayed storage ept endpoint ind indicator kbd keyboard net network provis provisioning rtpt Real Time Transport snd sound prof profiler xml Ext...

Page 1000: ...s Example 2 Functions and Info 16 32 48 log module dis 48 log module net 48 log module snd 48 In the above example functions and general information are logged for the display drivers network and sound modules Example 3 log module rtpt 0 log module ind 65535 In the above example all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time Transport module All debug levels are ON for the indicator module You can set...

Page 1001: ...VALUE N A RANGE N A EXAMPLE upload system info server tftp 132 432 0 43 69 sysinfo PARAMETER upload system info manual option CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the ability to manually upload support information from the IP Phone UI and Mitel Web UI IP Phone UI Options Phone Status Upload System Info Mitel Web UI Status System Information Support Inf...

Page 1002: ...em info on crash CONFIGURATION FILES startup cfg model cfg mac cfg DESCRIPTION Enables and disables the watchdog to automatically reboot the phone and send a crash file to the pre defined server FORMAT Boolean DEFAULT VALUE 0 RANGE 0 disabled 1 enabled EXAMPLE upload system info on crash 1 ...

Page 1003: ...Appendix B CONFIGURING THE IP PHONE AT THE ASTERISK IP PBX ...

Page 1004: ... Guide B 2 ABOUT THIS APPENDIX This appendix describes how to setup a user s phone with an extension to make and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX page B 3 ...

Page 1005: ...u just enter the machines name in the host field host dynamic defaultip 192 168 1 1 default IP address that the phone is configured to The password that phone1 will use to register with this PBX secret 1234 dtmfmode rfc2833 Choices are inband rfc2833 or info mailbox 1000 Mailbox for message waiting indicator If a phone is not in a valid context you will not be able to use it In this example sip is...

Page 1006: ... show peers at the console This will display the extensions that are registered at the IP PBX system This completes the basic set up for the 6867i phone with 1234 extension at theAsterisk IP PBX system Refer to Asterisk documentation for set up on extended or advanced features such as voicemail and call forwarding etc NAME USERNAME HOSTMASK MASK PORT STATUS phone1 phone1 192 168 1 1 D 255 255 255 ...

Page 1007: ...Appendix C SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FILES ...

Page 1008: ... 6869i and 6865i Sample 6867i and 6873i configuration files can be derived from the 6869i sample Sample 6863i configuration files can be derived from the 6865i sample TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Sample Configuration Files page C 3 6869i Sample Configuration File page C 3 6865i Sample Configuration File page C 10 ...

Page 1009: ...le The settings included here are examples only You should change comment the values to suit your requirements Not all possible parameters are shown refer to the admin guide for the full list of supported parameters their defaults and valid ranges The Mitel 6800 Series IP phones will download 2 configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting the startup cfg file the model cfg file and th...

Page 1010: ...teway DNS and TFTP Server Network Settings Notes If DHCP is enabled you do not need to set these network settings Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you may still have to set the dns address ip This value is unique to each phone on a server and should be set in the mac cfg file if setting this manually subnet mask default gateway dns1 dns2 Time Server Settings time server disabled...

Page 1011: ...uration files from Three protocols are supported TFTP FTP and HTTP download protocol TFTP valid values are TFTP FTP and HTTP TFTP server settings tftp server 192 168 0 130 alternate tftp server use alternate tftp server 1 If your DHCP server assigns a TFTP server address which you do not use you can use the alternate tftp server FTP server settings ftp server 192 168 0 131 can be IP or FQDN ftp us...

Page 1012: ...s x matches any digit 0 9 matches 0 or more repetitions of the previous expression matches any number inside the brackets can be used with a to represent a range expression grouping either or If the dialled number doesn t match the dial plan then the call is rejected sip digit timeout 3 set the inter digit timeout in seconds Example dial plans sip dial plan x xx this is the default dial string not...

Page 1013: ...e the Admin Guide for a detailed explanation of how this works sip screen name Joe Smith the name display on the phone s screen sip user name 4256 the phone number sip display name Joseph Smith the caller name sent out when making a call sip vmail 78 the number to reach voicemail on sip auth name jsmith account used to authenticate user sip password 12345 password for authentication account sip mo...

Page 1014: ...102 sip line5 proxy port 5060 sip line5 registrar ip 10 50 10 102 sip line5 registrar port 5060 sip line5 registration period 60 Softkey Settings Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone Setting softkeys as line call appearances should be done in the mac cfg file since these are unique to each phone Notes There are a maximum of 44 top softkeys that can be configured on the 68...

Page 1015: ... TOPSOFTKEY LINE This is line associated with the softkey For line softkeys the value must be between 3 and 24 1 2 are already hardcoded as the L1 and L2 hard key line call appearances Speed Dials topsoftkey1 type speeddial topsoftkey1 label Ext Pickup topsoftkey1 value 8 topsoftkey2 type speeddial topsoftkey2 label Call Return topsoftkey2 value 69 DND Key topsoftkey4 type dnd topsoftkey4 label DN...

Page 1016: ... full list of supported parameters their defaults and valid ranges The Mitel 6800 Series IP phones will download 2 configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting the startup cfg file the model cfg file and the mac cfg file These three configuration files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line sett...

Page 1017: ...P Server Network Settings Notes If DHCP is enabled you do not need to set these network settings Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you may still have to set the dns address ip This value is unique to each phone on a server and should be set in the mac cfg file if setting this manually subnet mask default gateway dns1 dns2 Time Server Settings time server disabled 1 Time server di...

Page 1018: ...o not use you can use the alternate tftp server FTP server settings ftp server 192 168 0 131 can be IP or FQDN ftp username mitel ftp password 6865imitel HTTP server settings for http bogus mitel com firmware http server bogus mitel com can be IP or FQDN http path firmware Dial Plan Settings Notes As you dial a number on the phone the phone will initiate a call when one of the following conditions...

Page 1019: ...n seconds Example dial plans sip dial plan x xx this is the default dial string note that is must be quoted since it contains a character sip dial plan 01 xxx 2 8 xxxx 91xxxxxxxxxx accept any 4 digit number beginning with a 0 or 1 any 5 digit number beginning with a number between 2 and 8 inclusive or a 12 digit number beginning with 91 sip dial plan terminator 1 enable sending of the symbol to to...

Page 1020: ...r line settings See the Admin Guide for a detailed explanation of how this works sip screen name Joe Smith the name display on the phone s screen sip user name 4256 the phone number sip display name Joseph Smith the caller name sent out when making a call sip vmail 78 the number to reach voicemail on sip auth name jsmith account used to authenticate user sip password 12345 password for authenticat...

Page 1021: ...egistrar ip 10 50 10 102 sip line5 registrar port 5060 sip line5 registration period 60 Programmable Key Settings Programmable keys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone Setting programmable keys as line call appearances should be done in the mac cfg file since these are unique to each phone Notes There are a maximum of 8 programmable keys that can be configured on the 6865i IP pho...

Page 1022: ...he extension you want to monitor PRGKEY LINE This is line associated with the prgkey For line prgkeys the value must be between 3 and 24 1 2 are already hardcoded as the L1 and L2 hard key line call appearances Speed Dials prgkey1 type speeddial prgkey1 value 8 prgkey2 type speeddial prgkey2 value 69 DND Key prgkey3 type dnd Line appearance prgkey4 type line prgkey4 line 5 blf prgkey5 type blf prg...

Page 1023: ...Appendix D SAMPLE BLF SOFTKEY SETTINGS ...

Page 1024: ...ENDIX This appendix provides sample BLF softkey settings for both the Asterisk server and the BroadSoft BroadWorks server TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Sample BLF Softkey Settings page D 3 Asterisk sipXecs BLF page D 3 BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF page D 4 ...

Page 1025: ...rt on Mitel IP phones SOFTKEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FORASTERISK SIPXECS BLF topsoftkey1 type blf topsoftkey1 value 9995551212 topsoftkey1 label John topsoftkey1 line 1 PROGRAMMABLE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR ASTER ISK SIPXECS BLF prgkey1 type blf prgkey1 value 9995551212 prgkey1 label John prgkey1 line 1 prgkey7 type blf prgkey7 value 9995551313 prgkey7 label Jane prgkey7 line 1 ...

Page 1026: ...1 topsoftkey2 type list topsoftkey2 label topsoftkey2 value topsoftkey2 line 1 list uri sip 9 192 168 104 13 PROGRAMMABLE KEY CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS FOR BROAD SOFT BROADWORKS BLF prgkey5 type list prgkey5 line 1 prgkey6 type list prgkey6 line 1 list uri sip 9 192 168 104 13 Note One softkey must be defined of type list for EACH monitored user So if there are 2 users being monitored 2 top softkey...

Page 1027: ...Appendix E SAMPLE MULTIPLE PROXY SERVER CONFIGURATION ...

Page 1028: ...Release 4 2 0 Administrator Guide E 2 ABOUT THIS APPENDIX This appendix provides a sample multiple proxy server configuration TOPICS This appendix covers the following topics TOPIC PAGE Multiple Proxy Server Configuration page E 3 ...

Page 1029: ...period 3600 sip dial plan x line info Fill in all necessary information below carefully Populate all lines even if there is only one account line 1 sip line1 auth name sip line1 password sip line1 mode 0 sip line1 user name sip line1 display name sip line1 screen name sip line1 proxy ip sip line1 proxy port 5060 sip line1 registrar ip sip line1 registrar port 5060 sip registration period 600 line ...

Page 1030: ...ode 0 sip line3 user name sip line3 display name sip line3 screen name line 4 sip line4 auth name sip line4 password sip line4 mode 0 sip line4 user name sip line4 display name sip line4 screen name sip line4 proxy ip sip line4 proxy port 5060 sip line4 registrar ip sip line4 registrar port 5060 sip registration period 500 ...

Page 1031: ...or long distance charges which result from unauthorized and or unlawful use Mitel shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages including but not limited to loss damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from the customer s use of or inability to use this product either separately or in combination with other equipment This paragraph however shall not apply to consequentia...

Page 1032: ...nal purchase date is to be provided with all products returned for warranty repairs EXCLUSIONS Mitel does not warrant its products to be compatible with the equipment of any particular telephone company This warranty does not extend to damage to products resulting from improper installation or operation alteration accident neglect abuse misuse fire or natural causes such as storms or floods after ...

Page 1033: ...upply of equivalent goods or ii the repair of the goods or iii the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods or iv the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired 1 2 Clause 1 1 is not intended to have the effect of excluding restricting or modifying a the application of all or any of the provisions of Part 5 4 of Schedule 2 to the Competition and Consumer Ac...

Page 1034: ...NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER INANACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE M5T SIP STACK M5T Portions of this software are 1997 2006 M5T a Division of Media5 Corporation M5T tm All intellectual property right...

Page 1035: ...source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other...

Page 1036: ...IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS...

Page 1037: ...ght terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided wi...

Page 1038: ...BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE D...

Page 1039: ...LITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OFTHE USE OFTHIS SOFTWARE EVEN IFADVISED OFTHE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE WIND RIVER SYSTEMS VXWORKS SOFTWARE The VxWorks Run Time software module is Copyright c WindRiver Systems Inc all rights reserved It is licensed for use not sold All use of this product and the VxWorks Run Time module is subject to agreement with the follo...

Page 1040: ...those portions OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWAREAND COPYRIGHTS Title to all copies of the Software remains with Intel or its suppliers The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United States and other countries and international treaty provisions You may not remove any copyright notices from the Software Intel may make changes to the Software or to items referenced therein at any time witho...

Page 1041: ...will immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel APPLICABLE LAWS Claims arising under this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of California excluding its principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the Sale of Goods You may not export the Software in violation of applicable export laws and regulations Intel is not obliga...

Page 1042: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for 6867i Premium

TCL 30Z Quick Start Manual preview
30Z
Brand: TCL Pages: 22
Olitech EasyFlip OLT2908 User Manual preview
EasyFlip OLT2908
Brand: Olitech Pages: 57
Xiaomi Redmi Note 10 JE Quick Start Manual preview
Redmi Note 10 JE
Brand: Xiaomi Pages: 10
HTC Gratia Quick Start Manual preview
Gratia
Brand: HTC Pages: 24
Mio DigiWalker A701 User Manual preview
DigiWalker A701
Brand: Mio Pages: 168
OPlus 5.7 MUSIC User Manual preview
5.7 MUSIC
Brand: OPlus Pages: 35
MTT L570 Manual preview
L570
Brand: MTT Pages: 34
Sony Ericsson U20a White Paper preview
U20a
Brand: Sony Ericsson Pages: 19
Alcatel One Touch 818 User Manual preview
One Touch 818
Brand: Alcatel Pages: 52
TCL Alcatel SHINE PLUS Repair Document preview
Alcatel SHINE PLUS
Brand: TCL Pages: 82
MWg Atom V User Manual preview
Atom V
Brand: MWg Pages: 129
Blackberry 8100 SMARTPHONE User Manual preview
8100 SMARTPHONE
Brand: Blackberry Pages: 230
Polycom CX 200 Quick Start Manual preview
CX 200
Brand: Polycom Pages: 4
Trikdis E16T User Manual preview
E16T
Brand: Trikdis Pages: 22
ORA VERA F2401 User Manual preview
VERA F2401
Brand: ORA Pages: 26
Poly Studio R30 User Manual preview
Studio R30
Brand: Poly Pages: 16
Micromax Q55 Bling User Manual preview
Q55 Bling
Brand: Micromax Pages: 64
EZLoop 3rd Generation Wi-Fi Phone User Manual preview
3rd Generation Wi-Fi Phone
Brand: EZLoop Pages: 82

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands